JP5844043B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  This type of slot machine is generally provided with game control means for controlling the progress of a game and effect control means for controlling the effect based on a command transmitted by the game control means. In addition, the game control means includes a basic process that processes in stages according to the progress of the game, and a timer interrupt process that periodically interrupts the basic process, and commands that are based on the progress of the game The command is stored in the command transmission buffer in the process, and the command stored in the command transmission buffer is transmitted in the subsequent timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the operation switch is detected in the timer interrupt process regardless of the progress of the game. There has been proposed a slot machine that determines whether or not has changed, and transmits an operation detection command indicating that it has changed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  Further, in order to reduce the load of software processing by the game control means, a hardware logic circuit for transmitting a command to the effect control means is provided separately from the CPU for controlling the game progress, and the CPU controls the game progress. There has been proposed a slot machine capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means independently of performing (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2009-297095 A JP 2006-43176 A

When a hardware logic circuit is used for command transmission as in the slot machine described in Patent Document 2, command transmission control is performed independently of software processing. By setting it, it will be sent immediately regardless of the software processing. On the other hand, when a command corresponding to the progress of a game is generated in the basic process and a command based on an event that occurs regardless of the progress of the game is generated in the timer interrupt process as in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, When the wear logic circuit is used, a command corresponding to the progress of the game is generated in the basic process and set immediately in the transmission area, and a command based on an event that occurs regardless of the progress of the game is interrupted by a timer interrupt. When a command with a data length exceeding the transmission unit is generated in the basic process, it is transmitted before the end of all transmission of the command. The interrupt process interrupts and generates a command that is different from the command being transmitted in the timer interrupt process. If set, transmission of the command generated in the basic process has not been completed, but a different command will be transmitted during that time, and it will not be possible to normally specify the command on the production control means side. The problem arises.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and in the slot machine that performs transmission of control information independently of the progress control of the game, the basic process in which the game control means performs the process step by step. An object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that can normally identify the command received by the effect control means even when the control information is transmitted in both the periodic interrupt processing performed by periodically interrupting the basic processing. .

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A plurality of variable display sections (including a plurality of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R) that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified,
After variably displaying the variable display portion, the display result is derived by stopping the variability display on the variable display portions (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a plurality of variable display portions (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are displayed. In a slot machine (slot machine 1) that can generate a prize according to a combination of display results,
A game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting control information (command);
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling production based on control information (command) received from the game control means (main control unit 41);
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player for deriving the display result;
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Prior determination means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a winning to occur before the display result is derived,
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result;
In accordance with a combination of identification information derived on a specific combination line (winning line LN) among a plurality of predetermined combination lines (winning line LN, invalid line LM) passing through the plurality of variable display portions, a winning is made. Winning determination means for determining whether or not it has occurred,
Basic processing means for performing basic processing (game processing) for executing processing in a predetermined order;
A periodic interrupt processing means for performing periodic interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) for interrupting the basic processing and executing processing at regular time intervals;
A communication circuit including control information storage means (transmission data register 561) capable of storing the control information (command);
Including
The processing circuit is
In the basic process (game process), a plurality of first control information (first commands) that make sense according to the progress of the game is generated, and the control information storage means (transmission data register 561) stores the first control information. 1 control information is stored in order of transmission (1 byte) one by one,
In the periodic interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)), second control information (second command) is generated according to an event that occurs regardless of the progress of the game, and the control information storage means (transmission) The data register 561) is stored,
The communication circuit sends the control information (command) stored in the control information storage means (transmission data register 561) to the basic process (game process) and the regular period by the processing circuit in the order in which the control information is stored. Without interrupting the interruption process (timer interruption process (main)), it is transmitted to the effect control means (sub control unit 91) in parallel.
The processing circuit is
Storage of the plurality of first control information (first command) in the control information storage means is started until the storage of the plurality of first control information (first command) is completed. A periodic interrupt processing prohibiting means for prohibiting execution of the periodic interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) in a period;
The prize is
A first winning (middle bell) generated by deriving a specific combination of identification information (bell-bell-bell) to a specific combination line (winning line LN) among the plurality of combination lines;
A combination (bell-bell-bell) of the specific identification information is derived to any combination line (invalid line LM) other than the specific combination line among the plurality of combination lines, and the combination lines Of these, combinations of predetermined identification information different from the combination of the specific identification information (replay / plum-bell-replay / plum, replay / plum-orange / BAR-orange / BAR) on the specific combination line (winning line LN) ) Is derived and the second winning (lower right bell, upper bell),
Including
When the display result is derived to all of the plurality of variable display units and the first winning is generated , the processing circuit includes the specific identification information aligned with the specific combination line among the plurality of combination lines. Specific control information that can specify a combination of the predetermined identification information that can be specified in combination with the specific combination line among the plurality of combination lines when the second winning is generated Generate control information,
The production control means has a combination of the specific identification information on any combination line of the plurality of combination lines, both when the specific control information is received and when the predetermined control information is received. It is characterized by performing an effect based on the derived .
According to this feature, the storage of the plurality of control information constituting the first control information in the control information storage means is started, and in the period until the storage of the plurality of control information is completed, the second Since the execution of the periodic interrupt processing that may cause the control information to be stored in the control information storage means is prohibited, a plurality of first control information that makes sense is stored in the control information storage means. Before the second control information is stored and the second control information is not transmitted between the plurality of first control information that makes sense, the production control means side does not transmit the first control information. The progress of the game in the game control means can be accurately identified from the control information.
In addition, the combination of specific identification information can be arranged on a specific combination line or other combination lines among a plurality of combination lines. However, whether or not a prize has been generated by the winning determination means for the effect control means. Since only the control information that can identify the combination of identification information arranged on the specific combination line to be determined is transmitted, an increase in the data amount of the control information transmitted to the effect control means can be suppressed.
Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to the gaming state.
The plurality of predetermined combination lines passing through the plurality of variable display units may be configured so that the player can recognize a combination of identification information derived on the combination line, and the identifications are aligned in a straight line. A line passing through the information may be used, but it is not necessarily a line passing through the identification information arranged in a straight line, and a line passing through the identification information arranged in the bent position may be used. In this case, for example, when the display results are derived for all the variable display units, and the combination of specific identification information is derived for any combination line, the combination of specific identification information is obtained by a backlight or the like. It is preferable to create an effect that emphasizes the combination line, or to provide decoration around the variable display area so that the combination line is recognized. Become.

The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1,
In the derivation control unit, the determination result of the prior determination unit is a specific determination result (middle bell, right bell), and the derivation operation unit (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is in a first order (middle bell). : Control for deriving the specific combination of identification information (bell-bell-bell) to the specific combination line (winning line LN ) when operated at middle first stop, right bell: first right stop) The determination result of the prior determination means is the specific determination result (middle bell, right bell), and the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is different from the first order. When the operation is performed in the order of 2 (middle bell: left, right first stop, right bell: left, middle first stop), the combination of the specific identification information (bell-bell-bell) is the plurality of combinations. The specific combination of lines A combination line other than the line (invalid line LM ) is derived, and the specific combination line (winning line LN ) includes the predetermined combination of identification information (replay / plum-bell-replay / plum, replay / plum-orange / It performs a BAR- orange / BAR) control to derive the,
The specific determination result by the pre-determining means is composed of a plurality of types (middle bell, right bell), and a combination of the specific identification information (bell-bell-bell) is determined according to the type of the specific determination result. The first order (middle bell: middle first stop, right bell: right first stop) aligned with the specific combination line (winning line LN ) and the combination of the specific identification information (bell-bell-bell) The second order (middle bell: left, right first stop, right bell: left, middle first stop) aligned with a combination line (invalid line LM ) other than the specific combination line is different.
According to this feature, depending on the type of the specific determination result, the operation order of the derivation operation means in which the combination of specific identification information is aligned with the specific combination line, and the combination of specific identification information is other than the specific combination line The operation order of the derivation operation means aligned with the combination line can be changed.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1 or means 1, wherein
First detection means (a latch flip-flop 557A) for detecting that a predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) is input;
Second detection means (switch input determination processing) for detecting that the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) is input;
Numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) for updating numerical data;
Updated by the numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) based on the detection of the input of the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) by the first detecting means (latch flip-flop 557A). Random number extraction means (random number latch selector 558A) for extracting numerical data as a random value and storing it in a first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D);
After the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area (random value register R1D) by the random number extraction means (random number latch selector 558A), the random number extraction is performed until the stored numerical data is read out. New numerical data is not stored by the means (random number latch selector 558A), and numerical data holding means (new data) that holds the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D) Prohibiting the latching of numerical data)
A numerical value for determining whether or not numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D) at every fixed time (about 2.24 ms) (whether or not the random number latch flag is set). Data storage judging means;
When the numerical data storage determining means determines that numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D) (the random number latch flag is set), the first numerical data By reading the numerical data stored in the storage area (random value register R1D), the numerical data holding unit releases the numerical data, and the read numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area ( Numerical data reading means for storing in a second numerical data storage area (random value storage work) different from the random value register R1D);
Based on the fact that the second detection means (switch input determination processing) has detected the input of the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7), it is stored in the second numerical data storage area (random number storage work). Game-related decision processing means (internal lottery) for performing a process for making a decision related to a game using the numerical data that is stored,
Game data holding means (backup power supply) for holding at least a part of game data (stored data in the RAM 507) even when power supply to the slot machine (slot machine 1) is stopped;
When power interruption conditions (detection of a voltage drop signal) are established, power interruption processing (electric power interruption processing (power interruption processing ()) is made possible based on the game data (stored in the RAM 507) held by the game data holding means. Power interruption processing execution means for executing main)),
A start command means for performing a start command (user reset) when the power supply continues for a certain time without stopping after the power cut processing (power cut processing (main));
Control state return means for returning to the control state before the power interruption process based on the game data (stored in the RAM 507) held by the game data holding means in response to the activation command (user reset);
Numeric data is stored in the first numeric data storage area (random number register R1D) in a period of waiting for the power supply to stop after execution of the power interruption process (power interruption process (main)). If it is determined whether the numerical data is stored, the stored numerical data is read to read out the stored numerical data by the numerical data holding means. Time holding release means (dummy reading of numerical data after power interruption processing),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is determined whether or not numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area at regular intervals. When numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area, The numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area is read out, and the numerical data holding means is released from the numerical data holding means, and the numerical value is stored in the first numerical data storage area due to noise or the like. Even if the data is stored and the numerical data is retained, the state does not continue for a certain period of time and is extracted at the timing when the process for making a decision related to the game is performed with the detection of a predetermined signal It is possible to acquire the numerical data obtained.
The numerical data storage determining means determines that new numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area, and whenever the numerical data is read from the first numerical data storage area, the second numerical data is stored. The numerical data in the storage area is updated to the numerical data read from the first numerical data storage area, that is, the newly extracted numerical data, and the game-related determination processing means is stored in the first numerical data storage area. Since the numerical data stored in the second numerical data storage area is used instead of the stored numerical data, noise is added to the signal line after the numerical data is read from the first numerical data storage area. Even if the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area changes, the numerical data in the second numerical data storage area used by the game related determination processing means is affected. No Rukoto, even if such a determination can be made relating to the game by using the numerical data given signal is extracted by the detected timing.
In addition, if the power supply is not stopped after a certain period of time when the voltage drop temporarily due to a momentary power failure and the power interruption process is executed, a start command is issued and the original state is restored. When the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area during the period when the power supply is stopped, the numerical data is read and the numerical data is held by the numerical data holding means. Is released, the voltage temporarily becomes unstable, such as a momentary power failure, noise is applied to the signal line, and the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area, and the state is maintained. Even if it remains untouched, it will be immediately read out and new numerical data can be stored in the first numerical data storage area. Numerical data Without relevant decision will be made in the game with, it can be prevented from decisions related to the game by using the numerical data extracted at a timing different from that of the original trigger will be performed.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1, means 1 or 2,
A gaming machine (slot machine 1) capable of performing a predetermined game,
First detection means (a latch flip-flop 557A) for detecting that a predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) is input;
Second detection means (switch input determination processing) for detecting that the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) is input;
Numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) for updating numerical data;
Updated by the numerical data updating means (random number sequence changing circuit 555) based on the detection of the input of the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) by the first detecting means (latch flip-flop 557A). Random number extraction means (random number latch selector 558A) for extracting numerical data as a random value and storing it in a first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D);
After the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area (random value register R1D) by the random number extraction means (random number latch selector 558A), the random number extraction is performed until the stored numerical data is read out. New numerical data is not stored by the means (random number latch selector 558A), and numerical data holding means (new data) that holds the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D) Prohibiting the latching of numerical data)
Interrupt generating means for generating an interrupt (random number latch interrupt) when numerical data is stored in the numerical data storage area (random number register R1D);
By reading the numerical data stored in the numerical data storage area (random number value register R1D) in response to the interrupt generation means generating the interrupt (random number latch interrupt), the numerical data The holding of the numerical data by the holding means is released, and the read numerical data is stored in a second numerical data storage area (random number storage work) different from the first numerical data storage area (random number register R1D). Numerical data reading means (random value latch interrupt processing (modification)),
Based on the fact that the second detection means (switch input determination processing) has detected the input of the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7), it is stored in the second numerical data storage area (random number storage work). Game-related decision processing means (internal lottery) for performing a process for making a decision related to a game using the numerical data that is stored,
Game data holding means (backup power supply) for holding at least a part of game data (stored data in the RAM 507) even when power supply to the slot machine (slot machine 1) is stopped;
When power interruption conditions (detection of a voltage drop signal) are established, power interruption processing (electric power interruption processing (power interruption processing ()) is made possible based on the game data (stored in the RAM 507) held by the game data holding means. Power interruption processing execution means for executing main)),
A start command means for performing a start command (user reset) when the power supply continues for a certain time without stopping after the power cut processing (power cut processing (main));
Control state return means for returning to the control state before the power interruption process based on the game data (stored in the RAM 507) held by the game data holding means in response to the activation command (user reset);
Numeric data is stored in the first numeric data storage area (random number register R1D) in a period of waiting for the power supply to stop after execution of the power interruption process (power interruption process (main)). If it is determined whether the numerical data is stored, the stored numerical data is read to read out the stored numerical data by the numerical data holding means. Time holding release means (dummy reading of numerical data after power interruption processing),
Comprising
According to this feature, an interruption occurs when numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area, and the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area is read in response to the interrupt. The numerical data holding by the numerical data holding means is released, and even if the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area due to noise or the like, the numerical data is immediately received in response to the occurrence of an interrupt. Since it is read out and new numerical data can be stored, even if numerical data is stored due to noise, etc., it is extracted at the timing when processing for making a decision related to the game is performed with detection of a predetermined signal It is possible to acquire the numerical data obtained.
Further, every time numerical data is read from the first numerical data storage area when new numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area and an interruption occurs, the numerical data in the second numerical data storage area Is updated to the numerical data read from the first numerical data storage area, that is, the newly extracted numerical data, and the game-related determining means stores the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area. Instead, since the numerical data stored in the second numerical data storage area is used, after the numerical data is read from the first numerical data storage area, the numerical data changes due to noise on the signal line. Even in such a case, there is no effect on the numerical data in the second numerical data storage area used by the game-related determining means. In the extracted numerical data can make a decision related to the game using.
In addition, if the power supply is not stopped after a certain period of time when the voltage drop temporarily due to a momentary power failure and the power interruption process is executed, a start command is issued and the original state is restored. When the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area during the period when the power supply is stopped, the numerical data is read and the numerical data is held by the numerical data holding means. Is released, the voltage temporarily becomes unstable, such as a momentary power failure, noise is applied to the signal line, and the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area, and the state is maintained. Even if it remains untouched, it will be immediately read out and new numerical data can be stored in the first numerical data storage area. Numerical data Without relevant decision will be made in the game with, it can be prevented from decisions related to the game by using the numerical data extracted at a timing different from that of the original trigger will be performed.

In the means 2 and 3, the start command means performs the start command when the power supply is not stopped after the power interruption process is executed. For example, a certain time has elapsed after the power interruption process is executed. Alternatively, the start command may be issued when the power does not stop, or the supply voltage may be monitored after the power interruption process is executed, and the start command may be issued when the supply voltage exceeds a certain value.
Further, in the means 2 and 3, the numerical data holding means extracts the random number until the stored numerical data is read after the numerical data is stored in the first numerical data storage area by the random number extracting means. The numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area may be retained by prohibiting new extraction of numerical data by the means, or the random number extraction may be performed in the first numerical data storage area. After the numerical data is stored by the means, the storage in the first numerical data storage area is prohibited even if the random number extracting means extracts the numerical data until the stored numerical data is read. Thus, the numerical data stored in the first numerical data storage area may be held.
In addition, in the means 2 and 3, the game-related determination processing means may perform a process for making a game-related decision, or may be a process for making a game-related decision itself, or a game-related decision. It may be a process of determining numerical data as a lottery value when making a decision. In the latter case, it is not necessary to make a decision related to the game at that time.
The first detection means is detection means for detecting an input of a predetermined signal that triggers the random number extraction means to extract numerical data, and the second detection means is the game-related determination processing means. Is a detection means for detecting the input of a predetermined signal that triggers a process for making a decision related to a game, and the first detection means and the second detection means are configured separately. good. The predetermined signal detection method by the first detection means and the predetermined signal detection method by the second detection means may be the same method or different methods.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 2 or 3,
The random number extraction means (random number latch selector 558A) is configured to detect the first detection means (latch flip-flop 557A) regardless of whether or not the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7) is involved in the game progress control. ) Detects the input of the predetermined signal (on of the start switch 7), extracts the numerical data as a random value, and stores it in the numerical data storage area (random value register R1D). Yes.
According to this feature, the first detection means only needs to detect that the predetermined signal is input regardless of whether or not the predetermined signal is involved in the progress control of the game. The detection circuit for the predetermined signal by the detection means can be made simple.

It is a front view of the slot machine of Example 1 to which the present invention was applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map in a main control part. It is a figure which illustrates the main part of a program management area and a built-in register. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in a header and function setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in 1st random number initial setting, 2nd random number initial setting, and interruption initial setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting content in security time setting. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an internal information register. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number sequence change register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change operation | movement of the random number update rule by a random number sequence change circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change operation | movement of the random number update rule by a random number sequence change circuit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random value acquisition register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number latch selection register. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a random value register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number latch flag register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a random number interrupt control register. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an input port register. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a serial communication circuit. It is a figure which shows the transmission condition of the command by a serial communication circuit. It is a figure which shows the area | region initialized according to the RAM area | region and initialization conditions which a main control part mounts. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (main) which a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the security check process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random number circuit setting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random circuit abnormality inspection process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the command storage process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process which a main control part performs when an error generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which a main control part performs after a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs for every fixed interval. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs for every fixed interval. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the switch input determination process which a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random value reading process which a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the door monitoring process which a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the command transmission process which a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the power interruption process (main) performed according to having detected the power interruption in the timer interruption process (main). It is a timing chart for demonstrating operation | movement in a random number circuit. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between operation of a start switch, and a random value register. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between operation of a start switch, and a random value register. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random value latch interruption process which a main control part performs when numerical data is latched in the random number circuit in a modification. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the operation of the start switch in a modification, and a random value register. It is a timing chart which shows the detection condition of a start switch. 10 is a timing chart showing a relationship between command storage processing and timer interrupt processing (main) permission / prohibition. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of special combination, the symbol combination of a special combination, and a special combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of re-game player, the symbol combination of a re-game player, and a re-game player. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the symbol combination of a transfer event, and a transfer event. It is a figure for demonstrating a game state and transition of RT. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a game state and RT. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is permitted by a lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several re-game player winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several small part winning. It is a timing chart which shows the update conditions, such as RT flag and game state flag. It is a timing chart which shows the update conditions, such as RT flag and game state flag. It is a timing chart which shows the update conditions, such as RT flag and game state flag. It is a timing chart which shows the update conditions, such as RT flag and game state flag. It is a timing chart which shows the update conditions, such as RT flag and game state flag. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the table referred in AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the janken chance performed during RB. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the table referred in game number lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the table referred in lottery mode lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the no navigation area in RT3, a part navigation area, and all the navigation areas. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of the no navigation area in RT3, a part navigation area, and all the navigation areas. It is a figure which shows transition of the number of remaining games at the time of AT interruption. It is a figure which shows the payout table 1 of a reel panel and a lower panel. It is a figure which shows the payout table 2 which can be displayed on a liquid crystal display.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface, and a pivotable pivot at a side end of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is supported.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer periphery of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “plum”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided in the approximate center of the reel panel 1c of the front door 1b.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  At the position corresponding to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the front door 1b, a horizontally long rectangular see-through window 3 that allows the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be seen through from the front side is provided. The reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The front door 1b uses a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the maximum bet number (3 in any game state in this embodiment) among the prescribed number of bets determined according to the game state, is stored as credits. Settlement switch 10 operated when paying out medals used for setting medals and betting numbers (returning medals used for setting credits and betting numbers), start switch operated when starting a game 7. Stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and an effect switch 56 for use in effects. It is provided so as to be operated by the skill person.

  In this embodiment, among the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like. Game assist indicator 12, 1BETLED14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 by lighting, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 and 2 that the bet number is set by 3 3BET LED 16 to notify, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted by lighting, start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (the previous game start) Waiting for the start of reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since Weight in LED19 for notifying by lighting a a is that during the game display section 13 in the replay LED20 is provided for informing is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the bet amount by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided inside the 8R to notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid by lighting. It has been.

  Further, below the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R on the front door 1b, a lower panel on which a title of the slot machine 1 and a payout table 1 to be described later are printed is provided.

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. The set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time, and the validity / invalidity of the stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of the BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) A check switch 36a for selecting the automatic settlement function that controls automatic settlement at the end of BB, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation). An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting invalidity, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are provided in a hopper tank 34a (described later with reference to FIG. 2) provided inside the housing 1a. And a medal having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowed down to the hopper tank 34a side. A selector (not shown) and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  The front side of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state. There are provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery to be described later, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned on / off. .

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. In the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of bets is set to three regardless of the gaming state and the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay line LN becomes valid. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage, is used as the winning line. It has been established. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  In the present embodiment, invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4 are set apart from the winning line LN in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning line. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not determined based on the combination of symbols aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. When the combination of symbols constituting a specific prize is arranged on the winning line LN, the invalid line LM1 to LM4. When a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) is awarded when the winning line LN is aligned with any of the LM1 to LM4, the symbols constituting the particular winning line LN It is easy to recognize that the combination is complete. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, an invalid line LM1 and a lower stage of the reel 2L, which are set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper stage. , The lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower stage, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the lower side There are four types of invalid lines LM3 set across straddling symbols LM3, lower stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, upper stage of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 set straddling to the right. It is defined as.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is displayed on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line LN. If the game stops as a result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols. .

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead is used. Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The symbols arranged within 5 frames including can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. In addition, a command transmission line from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91, which will be described later, and a power supply line for supplying power from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 are connected via a single cable and connector. Are connected to each other, and all the connectors that connect these cables and the respective boards are connected to each other so that the respective parts on the side of the effect control board 90 can operate and receive commands from the main control part 41. Become. For this reason, unless the command transmission line for transmitting a command from the main control unit 41 is connected to the effect control board 90, power is not supplied to the effect control board 90, and only the effect control board 90 side operates. There is no end to it.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a main control unit 41, a control clock generation circuit 42, a random number clock generation circuit 43, a switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, and a power interruption detection circuit. 48 and a reset circuit 49 are mounted.

  The main control unit 41 is configured by a one-chip microcomputer, executes a control program stored in a ROM 506, which will be described later, and performs processing related to the progress of the game, and also includes a control circuit mounted on the game control board 40. Control each part directly or indirectly.

  The control clock generation circuit 42 generates a control clock CCLK serving as an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency outside the main control unit 41. The control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 is supplied to the clock circuit 502 via the control external clock terminal EXC of the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 5A, for example. The random number clock generation circuit 43 generates a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, outside the main control unit 41. The random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 is supplied to the random number circuit 509 via the random number external clock terminal ERC of the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 5A, for example. As an example, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 may be set to be equal to or lower than the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42.

  The switch detection circuit 44 takes in detection signals input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 and transmits them to the main control unit 41. The motor drive circuit 45 transmits the motor drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit transmits the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a voltage drop is detected. The reset circuit 49 provides a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in a state where the power is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. The reset circuit 49 has a built-in watchdog timer 49a (see FIG. 5B). When the watchdog timer 49a times out, that is, when the operation of the CPU 505 of the main control unit 41 stops for a certain period of time, A user reset signal is given to the control unit 41.

  FIG. 5A shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 5A is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a specific information storage circuit 503, a reset / interrupt controller 504, a CPU 505, and a ROM 506. A RAM 507, a CTC (counter / timer circuit) 508, a random number circuit 509, a PIP (parallel input port) 510, a serial communication circuit 511, and an address decode circuit 512.

  FIG. 6 shows an example of an address map in the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 6, the area from address 0000H to address 1FFFH is allocated to the ROM 506 and includes a user program area and a program management area. FIG. 7A shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the program management area in the ROM 506. The area from address 2000H to address 20FFH is a built-in register area assigned to the built-in register of the main control unit 41. FIG. 7B shows an example of the usage and contents of the main part of the built-in register area. An area from address 7E00H to address 7FFFH is a work area assigned to the RAM 507, and can be assigned to an I / O map or a memory map. An area from address FDD0H to address FDFBH is an XCS decode area allocated to the address decode circuit 512.

  The program management area is a storage area for storing information necessary for the CPU 505 to execute the user program. As shown in FIG. 7A, the program management area includes a header KHDR, a function setting KFCS, a first random number initial setting KRS1, a second random number initial setting KRS2, an interrupt initial setting KIIS, a security time setting KSES, include.

  A header KHDR stored in the program management area indicates reading setting of internal data in the main control unit 41. FIG. 8A illustrates the correspondence between setting data and operation in the header KHDR. Here, the main control unit 41 can set a ROM read prevention function and a bus output mask function. The ROM read prevention function is a function for permitting or prohibiting the read operation for the data stored in the ROM 506 provided in the main control unit 41. When the read prohibition is set, the data stored in the ROM 506 cannot be read. The bus output mask function is used for address bus output, data bus output, and control signal output in the external bus interface 501 when an external device connected to the external bus interface 501 makes a read request for internal data of the main control unit 41. This function disables reading of internal data from an external device by applying a mask. As shown in FIG. 8A, the operation combination of the ROM read prevention function and the bus output mask function is set differently in accordance with the setting data of the header KHDR. Of the setting data shown in FIG. 8A, the setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as bus output mask valid data. Further, the setting data (all “00H”) in which ROM reading is prohibited and the bus output mask is valid is also referred to as ROM reading prohibiting data. The setting data for which ROM reading is permitted and the bus output mask becomes invalid is also referred to as bus output mask invalid data.

  The function setting KFCS stored in the program management area indicates the operation setting of the watchdog timer in the main control unit 41 and the use setting of various function shared terminals. FIG. 8B shows an example of setting contents in the function setting KFCS.

  The bit number [7-5] of the function setting KFCS indicates, for example, permission / prohibition of the operation of the watchdog timer that can be set as an interrupt factor in the reset / interrupt controller 504, and the cycle when it is permitted. In this embodiment, since an external watchdog timer is used, the watchdog timer is set to prohibit operation. The bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS indicates that the predetermined function shared terminal (first shared terminal) in the main control unit 41 is the second channel transmission terminal TXB used by the serial communication circuit 511 or the address decoding circuit 512. Is a TXB terminal setting that designates whether to use the chip select output terminal XCS13. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, if the bit value in the bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the first shared terminal is used for the second channel transmission in the serial communication circuit 511. This is the setting for the 2-channel transmission terminal TXB. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the first dual-purpose terminal is set to the chip select output terminal XCS13 used in the address decode circuit 512. In this embodiment, the bit number [4] of the function setting KFCS is set to “0” and the first shared terminal is set to the second channel transmission terminal TXB, so that serial communication with the effect control board 90 is possible. To.

  The bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS indicates that the predetermined function shared terminal (second shared terminal) in the main control unit 41 is the first channel transmission terminal TXA used by the serial communication circuit 511 or the address decoding circuit 512. Is a TXA terminal setting indicating whether the chip select output terminal XCS12 is used. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, if the bit value in the bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the second shared terminal is used for the first channel transmission in the serial communication circuit 511. 1 channel transmission terminal TXA is set. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the second dual-purpose terminal is set to the chip select output terminal XCS12 used in the address decode circuit 512. In this embodiment, the bit number [3] of the function setting KFCS is set to “0” and the second shared terminal is set to the first channel transmission terminal TXA, but the first channel reception is not used.

  For the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS, a predetermined function shared terminal (third shared terminal) in the main control unit 41 is used as the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511, or is used by the PIP 510. This is an RXA terminal setting indicating whether the input port is P5. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, if the bit value in the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the third shared terminal is used for the first channel reception in the serial communication circuit 511. 1 channel receiving terminal RXA is set. On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the third shared terminal is set to the input port P5 used in the PIP 510. In this embodiment, the bit number [2] of the function setting KFCS is set to “0” and the third shared terminal is set to the first channel reception terminal RXA, but the first channel reception is not used.

  The bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is an input used by the PIP 510, or a predetermined function shared terminal (fourth shared terminal) in the main control unit 41 is an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 505 or the like. This is an NMI connection setting indicating whether to set the port P4. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, if the bit value [1] in the bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the setting of the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI whose fourth shared terminal is connected to the CPU 505 and the like (CPU connection). On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the fourth shared terminal is set for the input port P4 used in the PIP 510 (CPU disconnected). In this embodiment, the bit number [1] of the function setting KFCS is set to “1” and the fourth shared terminal is set to the input port P4 used in the PIP 510, but the input port P4 is unused. .

  The bit number [0] of the function setting KFCS is an input used by the PIP 510, or the predetermined function shared terminal (fifth shared terminal) in the main control unit 41 is set to the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like. This is an XINT connection setting indicating whether to set the port P3. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the function setting KFCS is “0”, the setting of the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT in which the fifth shared terminal is connected to the CPU 505 and the like (CPU connection). On the other hand, if the bit value is “1”, the fifth shared terminal is set for the input port P3 used in the PIP 510 (CPU disconnected).

  The first random number initial setting KRS1 and the second random number initial setting KRS2 stored in the program management area indicate the initial setting of the random number circuit 509. FIG. 9A shows an example of the setting contents in the first random number initial setting KRS1. FIG. 9B shows an example of setting contents in the second random number initial setting KRS2.

  The bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is a random number circuit use setting indicating whether to use the random number circuit 509 or not. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, if the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “0”, the random number circuit 509 is not used (unused), but “1”. "Is set to use the random number circuit 509 (use). In this embodiment, the random number circuit 509 is set to be usable by setting the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 to “1”.

  The bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 uses the random number update clock RGK (see FIG. 12) used for updating the numerical data as the random number value in the random number circuit 509 as the internal system clock SCLK or for the random number This is a random number update clock setting indicating whether the clock RCLK is divided by two. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, if the bit value in the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “0”, the internal system clock SCLK is set to be used as the random number update clock RGK. If it is 1 ″, the random number clock RCLK is divided by two and used as the random number update clock RGK. In the present embodiment, the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1”, and the random number clock RCLK is divided by two to be used as the random number update clock RGK.

  The bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is a random number update rule setting indicating whether or not to change the random number update rule in the random number circuit 509 and the change method in the case of the change. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, if the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “00”, the random number update rule is not changed, and if it is “01”. The setting for changing the random number update rule by software is made after the second round, and if it is “10”, the random number update rule is automatically changed after the second round.

  The bit number [3-2] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to a fixed bit value “00”. Note that “B” of “00B” in FIG. 9B indicates binary display. The bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 indicates the setting relating to the start value in the numerical data that becomes the random value in the random number circuit 509. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “0”, the start value is set to a predetermined default value 0001H, while “1”. Is set to a value based on an ID number, which is unique identification information given to each main control unit 41. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “0”, the start value is not changed every time the system is reset. When it is 1 ″, the start value is changed every time the system is reset.

  In this embodiment, the bit value at bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1”, and the bit value at bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1”. Each time the system is reset, a value based on the ID number is set as the start value.

When the start value is set to a value based on the ID number, a part or all of the calculation for performing a predetermined scramble process on the ID number and the calculation such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division using the ID number are performed. It is only necessary to execute and use the calculated value as the start value. When the start value is changed at each system reset, for example, the count value of the free run counter built in the main control unit 41 is set to a predetermined internal register (random number start) provided in the main control unit 41 when the system reset occurs. Value register). Then, by using the stored value of the random number start value register as it is at the time of initial setting or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function), the start value is It may be determined at random. The free-run counter only needs to be backed up using a backup power source common to the backup location on the game control board 40. Alternatively, the free-run counter may be backed up by a power source provided separately from a backup power source used for a backup area in the RAM 507 or the like. Thus, by the free run counter it is backed up by backup power source, even when the power supply stops, the predetermined period will be counted value in the free run counter is stored.

  Further, in the case where two systems (corresponding to the first and second channels) for generating numerical data to be random numbers in the random number circuit 509 are provided, the first shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B. The bit number [3-0] of the random number initial setting KRS1 and the bit number [3-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 are used to indicate the initial setting in the first channel. On the other hand, the bit number [7-4] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 and the bit number [7-4] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 (omitted in FIGS. 9A and 9B), the second What is necessary is just to use as a thing which shows the initial setting in a channel.

  The interrupt initial setting KIIS stored in the program management area indicates an initial setting related to handling of maskable interrupts generated in the main control unit 41. FIG. 9C shows an example of setting contents in the interrupt initial setting KIIS.

  In the bit number [7-4] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, the upper 4 bits of the interrupt vector are set. In the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, a combination of priority levels of maskable interrupt factors is set. In the example shown in FIG. 9C, if any of “00H” to “02H” and “06H” is specified by the bit number [3-0] of the interrupt initial setting KIIS, the maskable interrupt from the CTC 508 A combination of priorities with the factor as the highest priority is set. On the other hand, if any one of “03H” and “07H” is designated, a combination of priorities that gives the highest priority to the maskable interrupt factor from the random number circuit 509 is set. If either “04H” or “05H” is designated, a combination of priorities with the highest priority given to the maskable interrupt factor from the serial communication circuit 511 is set. If the specified value is different even if the priority is a combination of priority with the maskable interrupt factor from the same circuit as the highest priority, the type of maskable interrupt factor with the highest priority and the priority combination in the second or lower order, etc. Is different.

  The security time setting KSES stored in the program management area is the frequency at which an abnormality is detected when monitoring the frequency of the random number clock RCLK, the time of the security mode in which the main control unit 41 starts operation (security time). ). Here, when the operation mode of the main control unit 41 is the security mode, a predetermined security check process is executed to check whether or not the contents stored in the ROM 506 have been changed. FIG. 10A shows an example of setting contents in the security time setting KSES.

  Bit number [7-6] of security time setting KSES is a random number clock abnormality detection setting indicating a frequency at which an abnormality is detected when the frequency of random number clock RCLK is monitored. FIG. 10B shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES. The bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES specifies a reference value (determination value) at which the frequency of the random number clock RCLK is detected as abnormal based on the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK. The bit number “5” of the security time setting KSES is set to a fixed bit value “0”.

  The bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES indicates a time setting when the security time is extended by a random time every system reset. FIG. 10C shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, if the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is “00”, the setting is not performed at random time extension. On the other hand, if the bit value is “01”, the short mode is set, and if the bit value is “10”, the long mode is set. Here, when the short mode or the long mode is designated, for example, the count value of the free run counter built in the main control unit 41 is changed to a predetermined built-in register (variable) included in the main control unit 41 when a system reset occurs. Store in the security time register. Then, the security time can be reduced by using the stored value of the variable security time register as it is at the initial setting or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function). What is necessary is just to determine the extension time at the time of extending at random. As an example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 6.0 MHz, the extension time is randomly determined in the range of 0 to 680 μs (microseconds) in the short mode, and in the range of 0 to 348, 160 μs in the long mode. The extension time is determined at random. As another example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 10.0 MHz, the extension time is randomly determined in the range of 0 to 408 μs in the short mode, and in the range of 0 to 208,896 μs in the long mode. The extension time is determined at random. The free-run counter used for randomly determining the extension time for extending the security time for each system reset randomly determines the start value of the random number generated by the random number circuit 509 for each system reset. Therefore, the counter may be the same as the free-run counter used for this purpose, or may be a counter provided separately.

Bit number [2-0] of security time setting KSES indicates time setting when the security time is set to one of a plurality of pre-selectable extended times in addition to the fixed time. FIG. 10D shows an example of setting contents in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES. In the example shown in FIG. 10D, if the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is “000”, there is no extension time added to the fixed time, and no setting is made. On the other hand, if the bit value is a value other than “000”, it is set to one of a plurality of extension times determined using the cycle T _SCLK of the internal system clock SCLK. In this case, a different extension time is set according to the designated bit value. As an example, if the bit value [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is “001” when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 6.0 MHz, about 699.1 ms in addition to the fixed time. An extension time of (milliseconds) is set. As another example, when the frequency of the internal system clock SCLK is 10.0 MHz and the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is “001”, in addition to the fixed time An extension time of about 419.4 ms is set.

  Further, the short mode or the long mode is set by the bit value [4-3] of the security time setting KSES, and the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to other than “000”. Thus, it is possible to set an extension time to be added to the fixed time. In this case, both the extension time corresponding to the bit value in the bit number [2-0] and the extension time randomly determined based on the bit value in the bit number [4-3] are fixed times. In addition, the security time during which the main control unit 41 is in the security mode is determined.

  The external bus interface 501 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 5A is an interface function between the external bus and the internal bus of the chip constituting the main control unit 41, the address bus, the data bus, and the direction of each control signal. A bus interface having a control function and the like. For example, the external bus interface 501 is connected to an external memory or an external input / output device externally attached to the main control unit 41, and transmits / receives address signals, data signals, various control signals, and the like to / from these external devices. Anything to do. In this embodiment, the external bus interface 501 includes an internal resource access control circuit 501A.

  The internal resource access control circuit 501A controls access to internal data of the main control unit 41 from an external device via the external bus interface 501, and stores internal data such as a game control program and fixed data stored in the ROM 506, for example. This is a circuit for limiting inappropriate external reading. Here, a circuit analysis device such as an in-circuit emulator (ICE) may be connected to the external bus interface 501 as an external device.

  As an example, according to the contents of the header KHDR stored in the program management area of the ROM 506, it is possible to switch between prohibiting or permitting reading of stored data in the ROM 506. For example, when the header KHDR is bus output mask invalid data, the ROM 506 can be read by an external device, and external reading of internal data is permitted. On the other hand, if the header KHDR is the bus output mask valid data, the ROM 506 can be read from the external device by masking the address bus output, data bus output and control signal output in the external bus interface 501, for example. Is disabled, and external reading of internal data is prohibited. In this case, when reading of internal data is requested from an external device connected to the external bus interface 501, a predetermined fixed value is output so that internal data cannot be read from the external device. . Further, when the header KHDR is ROM read prohibition data, the ROM 506 itself may not be read, and reading of stored data in the ROM 506 may be prevented. For example, in a ROM at the manufacturing stage, by making the header KHDR ROM read prohibition data, the ROM itself is made unreadable, and if it is a development ROM, bus output mask invalid data is written in the header KHDR, Allows verification of internal data by an external device. On the other hand, in the case of a mass production ROM, the bus output mask valid data is written in the header KHDR so that the CPU 505 and the like can read out the ROM 506 inside the main control unit 41 while the ROM 506 by an external device. It is only necessary to prevent reading of.

  As another example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A has requested that the internal data of the main control unit 41, such as all or part of the stored data in the ROM 506, be read from an external device connected to the external bus interface 501. Is detected. When detecting this read request, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether or not to allow the main control unit 41 to read internal data. For example, it is assumed that all or part of the stored data in the ROM 506 has been encrypted. In this case, if the read request from the external device is a read request for an encryption processing program or key data stored in the ROM 506, the internal resource access control circuit 501A rejects the read request and sets the main control unit 41. Reading of internal data is prohibited. In the external bus interface 501, a switch element is provided between the output port from which data stored in the ROM 506 is output and the internal bus. When the internal resource access control circuit 501 A prohibits reading of the internal data, the switch element May be controlled to be in an off state. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A reads the internal data depending on whether or not the read request from the external device requests reading of predetermined internal data (for example, a predetermined area of the ROM 506). You may make it determine whether it prohibits or permits.

  Alternatively, the internal resource access control circuit 501A may determine whether or not a predetermined authentication code has been input from an external device when detecting a read request for internal data. In this case, for example, a predetermined code pattern serving as an authentication code may be stored in advance in the internal resource access control circuit 501A or in a predetermined area of the ROM 506. When an authentication code is input from the external device, this authentication code is compared with the internally stored authentication code. If they match, a read request is accepted and the main control unit 41 is allowed to read internal data. . On the other hand, if the authentication code input from the external device does not match the authentication code stored internally, the read request is rejected and the internal control unit 41 is prohibited from reading the internal data. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether to prohibit or permit reading of the internal data depending on whether or not the authentication code input from the external device matches the authentication code stored internally. You may make it do. As a result, it is possible to read out the internal data of the main control unit 41 using a correct authentication code obtained in advance by an inspection organization or the like, and to check the validity of the internal data appropriately. .

  As yet another example, a read prohibition flag is provided in the internal resource access control circuit 501A, and reading of the ROM 506 by an external device is prohibited if the read prohibition flag is on. On the other hand, when the reading prohibition flag is in the off state, reading of the ROM 506 by the external device is permitted. Here, the read prohibition flag is off in the initial state, but once the read prohibition flag is turned on, the read prohibition flag cannot be cleared and returned to the off state. It ’s fine. That is, the read prohibition flag can be irreversibly changed from the off state to the on state. For example, the internal resource access control circuit 501A does not have a function of clearing the read prohibition flag to turn it off, and is set so that the read prohibition flag cannot be cleared by any instruction. Just do it. Then, the internal resource access control circuit 501A determines whether or not the read prohibition flag is on when the external device requests to read the internal data of the main control unit 41 such as the data stored in the ROM 506. At this time, if the read prohibition flag is on, the read request from the external device is rejected and the main controller 41 is prohibited from reading the internal data. On the other hand, if the read prohibition flag is off, the read request from the external device is accepted and the main controller 41 is allowed to read the internal data. With such a configuration, a provider who creates a game control program and stores it in the ROM 506 reads the program that has been debugged from the ROM 506 into an external device while the read prohibition flag is off. Can do. Then, when shipping after the debugging work is completed, by setting the read prohibition flag to the on state, external reading of the ROM 506 can be restricted thereafter, and the ROM 506 by the user of the slot machine 1 or the like can be restricted. Can be prevented from being read. As described above, the internal resource access control circuit 501A may determine whether to prohibit or permit reading of internal data depending on whether an internal flag such as a read prohibition flag is off or on. .

  Note that the read prohibition flag is not set irreversibly but can be changed from the on state to the off state, while the read prohibition flag is changed from the on state to the off state to permit reading of internal data. In this case, the external reading of the ROM 506 may be restricted by erasing the data stored in the ROM 506 (for example, flash erasure).

  The clock circuit 502 provided in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the oscillation signal input to the control external clock terminal EXC by two. In this embodiment, the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 is input to the control external clock terminal EXC. The internal system clock SCLK generated by the clock circuit 502 is supplied to various circuits such as the CPU 505 that control the progress of the game in the main control unit 41. The internal system clock SCLK is also supplied to the random number circuit 509 and used to monitor the frequency of the random number clock RCLK supplied from the random number clock generation circuit 43. Further, the internal system clock SCLK may be output from the system clock output terminal CLKO connected to the clock circuit 502 to the outside of the main control unit 41. It is desirable that the internal system clock SCLK is not output to the outside of the main control unit 41. As described above, by limiting the external output of the internal system clock SCLK, it becomes difficult to specify the operation cycle of the internal circuit (such as the CPU 505) of the main control unit 41 from the outside. In the case of updating by this, it is possible to prevent the random number update cycle from being specified externally.

  The unique information storage circuit 503 included in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information serving as internal information of the main control unit 41, for example. As an example, the unique information storage circuit 503 stores three types of unique information such as a ROM code, a chip individual number, and an ID number. The ROM 506 code is a 4-byte numerical value generated from stored data in a predetermined area of the ROM 506, and four numerical values with different generation methods may be prepared. The chip individual number is a 4-byte number assigned when the main control unit 41 is manufactured, and indicates a different numerical value for each chip constituting the main control unit 41. The ID number is an 8-byte number assigned when the main control unit 41 is manufactured, and indicates a different numerical value for each chip constituting the main control unit 41. Here, it is sufficient that the chip individual number can be read from the user program while the ID number cannot be read from the user program. The unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the ROM 506 by using a predetermined area of the ROM 506, for example. Alternatively, the unique information storage circuit 503 may be included in the CPU 505 by using a built-in register of the CPU 505, for example.

  The reset / interrupt controller 504 provided in the main control unit 41 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests generated inside or outside the main control unit 41. The reset controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 includes a system reset and a user reset. The system reset is a reset that occurs when a low level signal (system reset signal) is input to the external system reset terminal XSRST for a certain period. The user reset is performed when a low level signal (user reset signal) is input to the external user reset terminal XURST for a certain period of time, or when a time-out signal of the built-in watchdog timer (WDT) is generated, or when running outside the specified area. This reset is caused by a predetermined factor such as the occurrence of prohibition (IAT). In this embodiment, as described above, since the watchdog timer (WDT) mounted on the reset circuit 49 is used without using the built-in watchdog timer, a user reset signal is input to the external user reset terminal XURST. Alternatively, a user reset occurs when the out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) occurs.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5B, a reset circuit 49 incorporating a watchdog timer 49a is mounted on the game control board 40. The reset circuit 49 outputs a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 until the power supplied to the slot machine 1 becomes a stable voltage and a predetermined time elapses. When the watchdog timer 49a times out, a user reset signal is output to the main control unit 41.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (B), in the game control board 40, among the signal lines connected from the LED drive circuit 47 to the credit display unit 11, the drive signals of the plurality of segments constituting the credit display unit 11 are below. The signal line of the 1 digit B segment signal, the lower 1 digit C segment signal, the upper 1 digit B segment signal, and the upper 1 digit C segment signal is branched and connected to the watchdog timer clear signal terminal of the reset circuit 49 via the or circuit. Has been.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls to dynamically light any one of the lower 1 digit B segment, the lower 1 digit C segment, the upper 1 digit B segment, and the upper 1 digit C segment of the credit indicator 11. In order to dynamically light these segments, if the main control unit 41 is operating normally, one of the drive signals of these four segments should be output periodically. It is possible to determine whether or not the main control unit 41 is operating normally by monitoring whether or not the drive signal of any one of the segments is periodically output.

  A signal obtained by combining the drive signals of these four segments through the or circuit is input to the watchdog timer clear signal terminal of the reset circuit 49, and the watchdog timer 49a is cleared. The output of the drive signals of the four segments is stopped, the watchdog timer 49a is not cleared, and the user reset signal is output to the main control unit 41 when time is up.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the segment signal of the LED to which the drive signal is given periodically is branched to clear the watchdog timer 49a, and the CPU 505 of the main control unit 41 individually monitors the watchdog timer 49a. This is preferable because it is possible to monitor whether or not the main control unit 41 is operating normally without performing the process of clearing the watchdog timer, but the watchdog timer clear signal terminal of the reset circuit 49 from the main control unit 41 The watchdog timer 49a may be cleared by inputting an individual clear signal.

  In the present embodiment, the watchdog timer 49a is mounted on the reset circuit 49 provided outside the main control unit 41, but the main control unit is used by using the watchdog timer built in the main control unit 41. The operation of 41 may be monitored.

Interrupts controlled by the reset / interrupt controller 504 include a non-maskable interrupt NMI and a maskable interrupt INT. The non-maskable interrupt NMI is an interrupt that is unconditionally accepted even when the CPU 505 is in an interrupt-disabled state. When a low level signal is input to the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI (also used as the input port P4) for a certain period of time. An interrupt that occurs. The maskable interrupt INT is an interrupt that can permit / prohibit acceptance of an interrupt request by a setting instruction of the CPU 505, and multiple interrupts can be executed by setting priority. The cause of maskable interrupt INT is that a low level signal has been input to external maskable interrupt terminal XINT (also used as input port P3) for a certain period of time, and a timeout has occurred in the timer circuit included in CTC 508 A plurality of types of interrupt factors are determined in advance, such as the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to data transmission in the serial communication circuit 511 and the occurrence of an interrupt factor due to the acquisition of numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509. It only has to be done.

  The reset / interrupt controller 504 includes an interrupt mask register IMR (address 2028H), an interrupt wait monitor register IRR (address 2029H), among the built-in registers provided in the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. Interrupt control and reset management are performed using the monitor monitor register ISR (address 202AH) and the internal information register CIF (address 208CH). The interrupt mask register IMR is a register that sets what is used and what is not used among maskable interrupts INT caused by a plurality of different factors. The interrupt wait monitor register IRR is a register for confirming the generation state of a maskable interrupt request signal for each maskable interrupt factor set by the interrupt initial setting KIIS. The interrupt monitor register ISR is a register for confirming the processing state of the maskable interrupt request signal for each maskable interrupt factor set by the interrupt initial setting KIIS. The internal information register CIF is a register for managing the reset factor generated immediately before and recording the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK.

  FIG. 11A shows a configuration example of the internal information register CIF. FIG. 11B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the internal information data stored in the internal information register CIF. The internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is a random number clock abnormality instruction indicating the presence or absence of a frequency abnormality in the random number clock RCLK. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, when the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is not detected, the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 becomes “0”, whereas when the frequency abnormality is detected, the bit value is “1”. The internal information data CIF2 stored in the bit number [2] of the internal information register CIF is a system reset instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a system reset. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, when the immediately preceding reset factor is not a system reset (system reset has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data CIF2 is “0”, whereas when the system reset is a system reset (system reset) When the reset occurs), the bit value becomes “1”.

  The internal information data CIF1 stored in the bit number [1] of the internal information register CIF is a WDT timeout instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to a watchdog timer (WDT) timeout. . In the example shown in FIG. 11B, when the immediately preceding reset factor is not a user reset due to a watchdog timer timeout (timeout has not occurred), the bit value of the internal information data CIF1 becomes “0”, while the watchdog When a user reset is caused by a timer timeout (timeout occurs), the bit value becomes “1”. The internal information data CIF0 stored in the bit number [0] of the internal information register CIF is an IAT generation instruction indicating whether or not the reset factor generated immediately before is a user reset due to prohibition of travel outside the designated area (IAT). . In the example shown in FIG. 11B, when the reset factor immediately before is not a user reset due to the occurrence of traveling outside the designated area (no IAT occurrence), the bit value of the internal information data CIF0 becomes “0”, while When the user reset is caused by the occurrence of out-of-area travel (the occurrence of IAT), the bit value becomes “1”.

  The CPU 505 provided in the main control unit 41 executes processing for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 by executing the program read from the ROM 506. At this time, the CPU 505 reads out fixed data from the ROM 506, the CPU 505 writes various data to the RAM 507 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 505 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 507. The CPU 505 receives the input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501 or the PIP 510, and the CPU 505 receives the input of various signals via the external bus interface 501 or the serial communication circuit 511. A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 is also performed.

  As described above, in the main control unit 41, the CPU 505 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 506. Therefore, the main control unit 41 (or CPU 505) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 505 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the game control board 40.

  A ROM 506 provided in the main control unit 41 stores a user program for game control, fixed data, and the like. The ROM 506 stores a security check program 506A. The CPU 505 reads the security check program 506A stored in the ROM 506 when the main control unit 41 shifts to the security mode in response to the power-on of the slot machine 1 or the occurrence of a system reset, and whether the storage content of the ROM 506 has been changed. Execute security check processing to check whether or not. The security check program 506A may be stored in a built-in memory different from the ROM 506. Further, the security check program 506A may correspond to a security check process for inspecting the storage content of the external memory externally attached to the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, for example.

  A RAM 507 provided in the main control unit 41 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 507 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, at least part of the contents of the RAM 507 is stored for a predetermined period. In this embodiment, all areas of the RAM 507 are backup RAMs, and all contents of the RAM 507 are saved for a predetermined period even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped.

  The CTC 508 provided in the main control unit 41 includes, for example, an 8-bit programmable timer built in 3 channels (PTC0 to PTC2), and includes a timer circuit capable of generating a real-time interrupt and measuring time. Each programmable timer PTC0-PTC2 has a timer value that is updated in response to a change in the count clock signal generated based on the internal system clock SCLK (for example, a falling timing that changes from a high level to a low level). If it is good. In addition, the CTC 508 may incorporate, for example, an 8-bit programmable counter with 4 channels (PCC0 to PCC3). Each of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3 is only required to have its count value updated in response to a signal change of the internal system clock SCLK or occurrence of a timeout in any of the programmable counters PCC0 to PCC3. The CTC 508 resets the start time of the random number generated by the free run counter used for randomly determining the extension time (variable setting time) for extending the security time for each system reset or the random number circuit 509. A free-run counter or the like that is used for randomly determining each may be included. Alternatively, these free-run counters may be included in an internal circuit of the main control unit 41 different from the CTC 508 such as a backup area of the RAM 507, for example.

  A random number circuit 509 included in the main control unit 41 is a circuit that generates numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as a 16-bit random number. In the present embodiment, on the game control board 40 side, numerical data indicating a random value for internal lottery to be described later is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The CPU 505 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 509 based on the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 509 to process or update various numerical data by software, thereby indicating numerical data indicating a random value for internal lottery. May be counted. In the following, it is assumed that numerical data indicating random numbers for internal lottery is not processed by software from numerical data extracted by the CPU 505 from the random number circuit 509 serving as hardware. The random number circuit 509 may be incorporated in the main control unit 41 or may be externally attached to the main control unit 41 as a random number circuit chip different from the main control unit 41. .

  The random number for internal lottery is a value used to determine whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings, and takes a value in the range of “0” to “65535” in this embodiment.

  FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 509. As shown in FIG. 12, the random number circuit 509 includes a frequency monitoring circuit 551, a clock flip-flop 552, a random number generation circuit 553, a start value setting circuit 554, a random number sequence change circuit 555, a random number sequence change setting circuit 556, and a latch flip-flop. 557A, 557B, random number latch selectors 558A, 558B, and random number value registers 559A, 559B. Note that the random value register 559A and the random value register 559B are respectively a random value register R1D (address 2038H-2039H) and a random value register R2D (address) included in the built-in register of the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 203AH-203BH). In this embodiment, the random numbers to be acquired are only random numbers for internal lottery, and among the latch flip-flops 557A, 557B, the random number latch selectors 558A, 558B, and the random number value registers 559A, 559B, the latch flip-flop 557B, The random number latch selector 558B and the random number value register 559B are unused.

  The frequency monitoring circuit 551 is a circuit for monitoring the frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generating circuit 43 and detecting the occurrence of an abnormality. For example, the frequency monitoring circuit 551 monitors an oscillation signal input to the random number external clock terminal ERC, and sets the contents of the bit number [7-6] of the security time setting KSES based on the internal system clock SCLK (FIG. 10B When the frequency abnormality according to the reference) is detected, the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is set to “1”. In this embodiment, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 is input to the random number external clock terminal ERC.

  The clock flip-flop 552 is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop, and the random number clock RCLK from the random number external clock terminal ERC is input to the clock terminal CK. Further, in the clock flip-flop 552, the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar is connected to the D input terminal. The random number update clock RGK is output from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q, while the latch clock RC0 is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar. In this case, when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK input to the clock terminal CK changes a predetermined state, the clock flip-flop 552 has a positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q and a negative phase output terminal ( Inverted output terminal) Changes the signal state in the output signal from the Q bar. For example, the clock flip-flop 552 rises when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK changes from a low level to a high level, or rises when the signal state of the random number clock RCLK changes from a high level to a low level. The input signal at the D input terminal is captured at any one of the falling timings. At this time, from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q, the input signal captured at the D input terminal is output without being inverted, while the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar is output. From the input signal captured by the D input terminal is inverted and output. Thus, the random number update clock RGK having an oscillation frequency (for example, 10 MHz) that is ½ of the oscillation frequency (for example, 20 MHz) of the random number clock RCLK from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q of the clock flip-flop 552. Is output from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar, that is, the reverse phase signal (inverted signal) of the random number update clock RGK, that is, the same frequency as the random number update clock RGK and the phase of the random number update clock RGK is π. A different latch clock RC0 is output by (= 180 °).

  The random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552 is input to the clock terminal of the random number generation circuit 553 and used for incrementing the count value in the random number generation circuit 553. The latch clock RC0 output from the clock flip-flop 552 is branched into the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 at the branch point BR1. Therefore, the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 have the same oscillation frequency, and the signal state changes with a common cycle. Here, examples of changes in the signal state in the latch clock RC1 and the latch clock RC2 include a rising edge that changes from a low level to a high level and a falling edge that changes from a high level to a low level. The latch clock RC1 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557A and becomes a random number acquisition clock used for generating the latch signal SL1 at the start of the game.

  The oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK and the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 are different from each other, and one of the oscillation frequencies is the other oscillation frequency. It is never an integer multiple of. As an example, while the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK is 11.0 MHz, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK may be 9.7 MHz. Therefore, both the random number update clock RGK and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 are oscillation signals whose signal states change at a different period from the control clock CCLK supplied to the CPU 505. That is, the clock flip-flop 552 is based on the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43, and the random number update clock RGK for updating the count value, or the latch clock that is used as a plurality of random number acquisition clocks. As RC1 and RC2, oscillation signals whose signal states change with a period different from the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK (the control clock CCLK divided by two) are generated.

  The random number generation circuit 553 is composed of, for example, a 16-bit counter and the like, and based on an input such as a random number update clock RGK output from the clock flip-flop 552, a predetermined initial value within a predetermined range in which numerical data can be updated. It is a circuit that cyclically updates to a predetermined final value. For example, the random number generation circuit 553 responds to the rising edge in the random number update clock RGK that is an input signal to a predetermined clock terminal, and “65535” from the initial value set in the range from “0” to “65535”. The numerical data is counted up so that one is added at a time. Then, after counting up to “65535”, the numerical data is updated cyclically by counting up from “0” to a numerical value that becomes a final value that is 1 smaller than the initial value.

  The start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value in the count value generated by the random number generation circuit 553 in accordance with the bit value (see FIG. 9B) in the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2. Set. For example, the start value setting circuit 554 sets the start value to the default value “0000H” if the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “00”, and if it is “10”. The value is set based on the ID number. If “01”, the value is changed every time the system is reset. In this embodiment, the bit number [1-0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “10”, and a value based on the ID number is set as the start value in the count value generated by the random number generation circuit 553. Is done.

  The random number sequence change circuit 555 is a circuit that allows the permutation, which is the update order of the numerical data, to be changed to a permutation that conforms to a predetermined random number update rule when the numerical data generated by the random number generation circuit 553 makes a round. For example, the random number sequence change circuit 555 executes bit scramble processing such as bit replacement or transposition in numerical data output from the random number generation circuit 553. The random number sequence change circuit 555 can change the permutation, which is the update order of the numerical data, by changing the bit scramble key or the bit scramble table used for the bit scramble process, for example.

  The random number sequence change setting circuit 556 determines the update order of the numerical data in the random number sequence change circuit 555 according to the bit value (see FIG. 9A) in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1. It is a circuit for performing the setting to change. For example, if the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is “00”, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 sets the random number update rule not to change after the second round, while “01” If so, the random number update rule is changed in response to a change request by software after the second round, and if it is “10”, the random number update rule is automatically changed. In the present embodiment, the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “10”, and the random number update rule is automatically changed.

  When the random number update circuit 555 changes the random number update rule by software in response to the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “01”, FIG. Of the built-in registers included in the main control unit 41 as shown, the random number update rule RDSC (address 2034H) is used to control the change of the random number update rule. FIG. 13A shows a configuration example of the random number sequence change register RDSC. FIG. 13B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number sequence change request data stored in the random number sequence change register RDSC. The random number sequence change request data RDSC0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC indicates the presence / absence of a random number sequence change request when the random number update rule is changed by software. In the example shown in FIG. 13B, when the random number sequence change request is not made by software, the bit value of the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 is “0”. The bit value is “1”.

  FIG. 14 shows an operation example when the random number update rule is changed by software. In this case, when the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 is cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the response is that the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 is “1”. Then, change the random number update rule. In the operation example shown in FIG. 14, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “0 → 1 →... → 65535”. Thereafter, it is assumed that “1” is written to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC at a predetermined timing by the CPU 505 executing the user program stored in the ROM 506.

  In response to the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “01”, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 reads the random number sequence change request data RDSC0 and the bit value is “1”. In response to "," a setting for changing the random number update rule is made. At this time, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556, according to the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 reaching a predetermined final value, for example, any one of a plurality of types of random number update rules prepared in advance. The random number update rule is changed, for example, by selecting. In the operation example shown in FIG. 14, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs numerical data “65535” corresponding to the final value in the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553, and then responds to the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Change the random number update rule. Thereafter, the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs “65535 → 65534 →... → 0” as the random number sequence RSN according to the changed random number update rule. The random number sequence change register RDSC is initialized when the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 reads the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Therefore, until the bit value “1” is written to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC again, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “65535 → 65534 →... → 0”. Become.

  When the CPU 505 writes the bit value “1” again to the bit number [0] of the random number sequence change register RDSC, the random number update rule is changed again. In the operation example shown in FIG. 14, when the random number sequence change circuit 555 outputs the numerical data “0” corresponding to the final value in the random number sequence RSN, the bit value “1” is written as the random number sequence change request data RDSC0. Change the random number update rule accordingly. Thereafter, the random number sequence changing circuit 555 outputs “0 → 2 →... → 65534 → 1 →... → 65535” as the random number sequence RSN according to the changed random number update rule.

  FIG. 15 shows an operation example when the random number update rule is automatically changed. In this case, in response to the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 being cyclically updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 automatically changes the random number update rule. To change. In the operation example shown in FIG. 15, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 first is “0 → 1 →... → 65535”.

  When the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 reaches a predetermined final value, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 has a predetermined order from among a plurality of types of update rules prepared in advance. The update rule may be changed by selecting the update rule according to the above. Alternatively, the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 may change the update rule by selecting an arbitrary update rule from among a plurality of types of update rules. In the operation example shown in FIG. 15, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “65535 → 65534 →. Thereafter, due to the second change in the random number update rule, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “0 → 2 →... → 65534 → 1 →. In the operation example illustrated in FIG. 15, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 is “65534 → 0 →... → 32768” due to the third change in the random number update rule. When the fourth random number update rule change is performed, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “16383 → 49151 →... → 49150”. When the fifth random number update rule change is performed, the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 becomes “4 → 3 →... → 465553”.

  The latch flip-flop 557A is configured using, for example, a D-type flip-flop. In the latch flip-flop 557A, a wiring from the input port P0 included in the PIP 510 is connected to the D input terminal, and a wiring for transmitting the latch clock RC1 is connected to the clock terminal CK. In this embodiment, the game start signal SS1 from the start switch 7 is input to the input port P0. The latch flip-flop 557A captures the game start signal SS1 in response to the rising edge of the latch clock RC1, and outputs it as the game start latch signal SL1. Thus, in the latch flip-flop 557A, the game start signal SS1 is output as the game start latch signal SL1 in synchronization with the rising edge of the latch clock RC1.

The game start signal SS1 is not limited to that transmitted directly from the start switch 7. As an example, a timer circuit is provided that measures the time during which the output signal from the start switch 7 is on and outputs a game start signal SS1 when the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). May be.

  The random number latch selector 558A is a circuit that takes in the game start latch signal SL1 transmitted from the latch flip-flop 557A and the software random number latch request signal, and selectively outputs either one as the random number latch signal LL1. The random number latch selector 558A controls the output of the random number latch signal LL1 by using a random value fetch register RDLT (address 2032H) among the built-in registers provided in the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 7B. The random value acquisition register RDLT is a register used to acquire numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 into the random value register 559A by software. The random number latch selection register RDLS has a method of taking in the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence changing circuit 555 into the random value register 559A by software or by inputting a signal to the input port P0. It is a register to show.

  FIG. 16A shows a configuration example of the random value fetch register RDLT. FIG. 16B shows an example of the setting contents in each bit of the random number acquisition specification data stored in the random value acquisition register RDLT. The random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random value acquisition register RDLT indicates whether or not the random value acquisition specification is specified for the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 16B, when there is no specification of random number acquisition to the random number register R1D by software, the bit value of the random value acquisition specification data RDLT0 is “0”, while the random value acquisition is not performed. The bit value is “1” when an instruction is included.

  FIG. 17A shows a configuration example of the random number latch selection register RDLS. FIG. 17B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number latch selection data stored in the random number latch selection register RDLS. The random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS indicates a method of taking in the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 17B, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is “ 0 ”. On the other hand, when the numerical value data to be a random number value is taken into the random value register R1D in response to the signal input to the input port P0, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is set to “1”. In this embodiment, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 is “1”, and numerical data that becomes a random number value is taken into the random value register R1D in response to a signal input to the input port P0.

  The random value register 559A is a register that stores numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 as a random value. 18A and 18B show a configuration example of a random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. 18A shows the lower byte R1D (L) of the random value register R1D, and FIG. 18B shows the upper byte R1D (H) of the random value register R1D. The random value register 559A is a 16-bit (2-byte) register, and can store a 16-bit random value.

  The random value register 559A takes in the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 as a random value in response to the random number latch signal LL1 supplied from the random number latch selector 558A being turned on. Store with. When the register read signal RRS1 supplied from the CPU 505 is turned on, the random value register 559A is in a readable (enable) state and outputs stored numerical data to an internal bus or the like. On the other hand, when the register read signal RRS1 is in the off state, the same value (for example, “65535H” or the like) is always output, and the reading is disabled (disabled). Further, the random value register 559A may be in a state in which the register read signal RRS1 cannot be received when the random number latch signal LL1 is in the ON state. Further, the random value register 559A may be in a state in which the random number latch signal LL1 cannot be received when the register read signal RRS1 is in the on state before the random number latch signal LL1 is in the on state. good.

  The random value register 559A uses a random number latch flag register RDFM (address 2033H) and a random number interrupt control register RDIC (address 2031H) among the built-in registers provided in the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 7B. This enables operation management and interrupt control when latching random numbers. The random number latch flag register RDFM is a register that stores a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data serving as a random number value has been latched corresponding to the random value register 559A. The random number interrupt control register RDIC is a register that sets permission / prohibition of an interrupt that occurs when numerical data that becomes a random value is latched in the random number value register 559A.

  FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of the random number latch flag register RDFM. FIG. 19B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the random number latch flag data stored in the random number latch flag register RDFM. The random number latch flag data RDFM0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch flag register RDFM becomes a random number latch flag indicating whether or not numerical data has been taken into the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. In the example shown in FIG. 19B, when the numerical value data is not taken into the random value register R1D (no random value is taken), the bit value of the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “0”, while the numerical data is When fetched (with random number fetching), the bit value becomes “1”. In the state where the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “1”, that is, in the state where the numerical data is captured in the random value register R1D, the new numerical data is stored in the random value register even when a new random number capturing request is generated. In such a state, the numerical data in the random value register R1D is read and new numerical data is captured in the random value register R1D until the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is cleared. It becomes impossible.

  FIG. 20A shows a configuration example of the random number interrupt control register RDIC. FIG. 20B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of random number interrupt control data stored in the random number interrupt control register RDIC. The random number interrupt control data RDIC0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number interrupt control register RDIC allows an interrupt to be generated when numerical data is fetched into the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D. This shows the interrupt control setting to enable or disable. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, when interrupting at the time of fetching into the random value register R1D is prohibited (interrupt prohibited), the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC0 is set to “0”. When interrupt is permitted (interrupt permitted), the bit value is set to “1”. In the present embodiment, the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC0 is set to “0”, and no interrupt is generated even if numerical data is fetched into the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D.

  The PIP 510 included in the main control unit 41 is, for example, a 6-bit input dedicated port, and includes an input port P0 to an input port P2 serving as a dedicated terminal and an input port P3 serving as a function shared terminal and an input port P5. . The input port P3 is also used as an external maskable interrupt terminal XINT connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P4 is also used as an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI connected to the CPU 505 or the like. The input port P5 is also used as the first channel reception terminal RXA used by the serial communication circuit 511. The use setting of the input port P3 to the input port P5 is instructed by the function setting KFCS stored in the program management area.

  The PIP 510 performs state management of the input port P0 to the input port P5 using the input port register PI (address 2090H) among the built-in registers included in the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 7B. The input port register PI is a register that stores a bit value indicating the input state of the external signal corresponding to each of the input port P0 to the input port P5.

  FIG. 21A shows a configuration example of the input port register PI. FIG. 21B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the input port data stored in the input port register PI. The input port data PI5 stored in the bit number [5] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P5 that is also used as the first channel receiving terminal RXA. The input port data PI4 stored in the bit number [4] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P4 that is also used as the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. The input port data PI3 stored in the bit number [3] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P3 that is also used as the external maskable interrupt terminal XINT. The input port data PI2 stored in the bit number [2] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P2. The input port data PI1 stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P1. The input port data PI0 stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register PI indicates the terminal state (ON / OFF) at the input port P0.

  An address decoding circuit 512 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 5 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the main control unit 41 and a chip select signal that is a decoding signal for an external device. . By the chip select signal, an internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or an external device as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively and can be accessed from the CPU 505.

  The ROM 506 provided in the main control unit 41 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control user program and the security check program 506A. For example, the ROM 506 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 505 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 506 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 505 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the game control board 40.

  The RAM 507 provided in the main control unit 41 is provided with a game control data holding area 590 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. For example, a DRAM is used as the RAM 507, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 505 has a built-in refresh register for performing this refresh operation. For example, the refresh register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented each time the CPU 505 fetches an instruction from the ROM 506. Accordingly, the stored value in the refresh register is updated every execution time of one instruction in the CPU 505.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the serial communication circuit 511. A command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the sub control unit 91 toward the main control unit 41.

  As illustrated in FIG. 22, the serial communication circuit 511 includes a data register 560, a transmission data register 561, a transmission shift register 562, and a status register 563.

  The data register 560 is a register for temporarily buffering command data generated by the CPU 505 and transferred via the internal bus. The command data buffered in the data register 560 is stored in an empty area of the transmission data register 561. The

  The transmission data register 561 is a register that stores command data waiting for transmission. The transmission data register 561 is provided with an area capable of storing a plurality of command data, and can store a maximum of 32 bytes of command data.

  The transmission shift register 562 is a register for storing command data converted into serial data. The command data stored at the earliest stage among the command data stored in the transmission data register 561 is converted into serial data. And stored in the transmission shift register 562. When the command data is stored in the transmission shift register 562, the command data is immediately transferred to the sub-control unit 91.

  The status register 563 stores data indicating the transmission state of the serial communication circuit 511, such as transmission completion indicating whether or not command data is being transmitted, and data empty indicating whether or not command data is stored in the transmission data register 561. Register. When “1” is stored as the value of transmission completion, it indicates that the command data has not been transmitted or the transmission of command data has been completed, and when “0” is stored, Indicates that command data is being transmitted or is waiting for command data transmission. When “1” is set as the data empty value, it indicates that one or more command data waiting for transmission is stored in the transmission data register 561, and when “0” is stored. The transmission data register 561 indicates that command data waiting for transmission is not stored.

  The CPU 505 can refer to the value of the status register 563 via an internal bus, and the CPU 505 can check the transmission state of the serial communication circuit 511 by reading the value of the status register 563.

  Next, the operation status of the serial communication circuit 511 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when all the areas of the transmission data register 561 are in an empty state and no command data is transmitted by the transmission shift register 562, as shown in FIG. Both empty values are set to “1”.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, when the command data 1 and 2 are stored in the transmission data register 561 according to the transfer instruction of the CPU 505, both the transmission completion and data empty values change to “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 23C and 23D, the command data 1 stored first among the command data 1 and 2 stored in the transmission data register 561 is converted into serial data, and the transmission shift register 562 is converted. When the transmission of the command data 1 is completed, the next stored command data 2 is converted into serial data and transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by the transmission shift register 562. At the same time, the last command data is converted into serial data and stored in the transmission shift register 562. When the transmission data register 561 becomes empty, the value of the data empty changes to “1”, as shown in FIG. Thus, when the transmission of the last command data stored in the transmission shift register 562 is also completed, Completion value also changes to "1", a state in which transmission is completed for all the command data.

  The main control unit 41 receives the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the input port. The main control unit 41 executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection states of various switches input from these input ports.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main), which will be described later, is executed at a certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment) when a timeout occurs in the timer circuit included in the CTC 508.

  The main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, the main control unit 41 prioritizes according to a predetermined order. An interrupt to be executed is set. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process is completed, a new interrupt will occur at that point. It will be.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as a basic process, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute a process that moves in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). In addition, the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repeated process according to the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), an effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above, which are arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These effect devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output control unit may determine the output pattern of the effect device, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be performed. The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the effect device.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a and a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90 are detected. The switch detection circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information. The power supply voltage supplied to the timepiece device 97 and the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power drop detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub CPU 91a, other circuits, etc. , And the sub CPU 91a receives various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 and performs various controls for performing effects, and directly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. To control automatically or indirectly.

  The reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. When the power is turned on, the sub control unit 91 It starts at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power interruption detection circuit 98 has a voltage that outputs a voltage drop signal lower than the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Execute command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 executes an interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the number of input system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval.

  Also, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even when the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when an interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 507 is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 507 is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interruption process (main) is executed. If the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, the power interruption process (main) is executed. In the power interruption process (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 507, which will be described later. In addition to the storage, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 becomes 0 and stored in the RAM 507. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of the values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 507. For this reason, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main control unit 41 calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 507 at the time of activation, regardless of whether the system reset or the user reset, and the value of the data for destructive diagnosis And the processing state of the main control unit 41 is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 507 on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the value of the data for destruction diagnosis is also correct. However, if the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or the value of the destruction diagnosis data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state. However, the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the normal error state, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the above-described setting change state. It will not be released until

  In this embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 507 is held by the backup power source even in the event of a power failure, and the main control unit 41 determines that the data in the RAM 507 is normal when the power is turned on. In addition, the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 507. However, only the data stored in the RAM 507 that is necessary for returning to the control state in the event of a power failure is backed up and the power is turned on. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the data backed up at the time.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore the state of all input ports to the state before power interruption.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 24A, the storage area of the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a non-saved work, a general work, a special work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  Important work items include various indicators, LED display data, I / O input / output data, game time counters, and other data that can be inconvenient to initialize, as well as the RT flag and RT remaining game count described below. Work to be done. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 507 is destroyed at the time of activation. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a game state flag described later. The special work is a work that stores data such as various software random numbers that are initialized only before the setting is started. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 507, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main control unit 41 is stored, and the unused stack area is one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, if it is established, it will be initialized, but the in-use stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24B, the main control unit 41 is activated when the setting key switch 37 is on, when a RAM abnormality error occurs, when the BB ends, and when the setting key switch 37 is off. When the data in the RAM 507 is not destroyed at the time of startup in the state, when the five initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of areas that are initialized according to each initialization condition are different. Initialize the.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and transitions to a setting change state, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the storage area of the RAM 507, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the important work and the used stack area, that is, the unused stack area from the non-saved work shown in FIG. The area up to is initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, in the storage area of the RAM 507, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area, that is, the general work shown in FIG. The area up to the used stack area is initialized. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an off state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 507 is not destroyed. In the initialization 3, the unsaved work, the unused area, and the The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 507 are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 is performed before the change of the setting change state. However, the initialization 1 is performed at the end of the setting change state, or both before the change of the setting change state and at the end of the setting change state. Also good.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a RAM abnormality error occurs at the time of power-on or the like, initialization 1 is executed, and the control state before that is initialized. The RT flag and the RT remaining game number assigned to are held without being initialized. On the other hand, the gaming state flag assigned to the general work is initialized as initialization 1 is executed.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state (usually inside, BB (RB)) is determined, and is determined according to the gaming state. The game can be started on the condition that the specified number of bets has been set. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line). When a combination of symbols called a combination is arranged on the winning line, a winning is achieved. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the game state, it is necessary to win an internal lottery described later and set a winning flag for the winning combination in the RAM 507.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value of the random number storage work assigned to the RAM 507 is set to the lottery work assigned to the RAM 507. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the value of the gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state, and the RT described later are specified. The determination is made according to the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the value of the RT flag, the number of bets, and the set value.

  The random value storage work is a storage area for storing numerical data latched in the random value register R1D simultaneously with the operation of the start switch 7, and is latched every time new numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D. The numerical data is read in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main), and the numerical data stored in the random value storage work is updated to the latest latched numerical data.

  In the internal lottery, an internal lottery target, a current gaming state flag value, an RT flag value, and the number of determination values determined corresponding to the set value are stored in a random number for internal lottery (a lottery work). When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  If a winning combination of any combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 507. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

The main control unit 41 refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 506 when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Then, a stop control table is created for each rotating reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even when the winning combinations are different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (the number of steps that one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main control unit 41 effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel is described. To explain, when any operation corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the non-winning winning combination is drawn so that it is not aligned on the winning line. A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and reel stop control is performed. If no winning combination is selected, a stop control table with a determined number of sliding symbols that do not have any combination And stop control of the reel. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination that has not been performed will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, such as when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the winning small role is the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line. The number of sliding frames is fixed so that it can be drawn to the limit, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames in the winning line, the winning special role is in the range of 4 frames in the winning line Then, a stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn in, and the small combination is not aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  In this example, when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected, the special role and the small role are won simultaneously. If the selected special role is given priority over the selected special role, the special role is controlled on the winning line only when the small role cannot be withdrawn. When winning simultaneously, priority is given to the control for aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and the control for aligning the small role on the winning line may be performed only when the special role cannot be drawn.

  If a special player and a replaying player are elected at the same time, such as when a replaying player is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, when the stop operation is performed, In addition, a control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped within a drawing range of up to 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer to be simultaneously elected are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, that is, within 4 frames, for any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the timing of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Without fail, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the main control unit 41 rotates the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected yet until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Continuously, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  Next, various control contents executed by the main control unit 41 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the system reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the main control unit 41 performs a startup process (main) shown in the flowchart of FIG. When a user reset signal is input, the process starts from the step Sa2 of the startup process (main). That is, while starting from the security mode in which the security check process is performed only in the case of activation upon power-on, the user program stored in the ROM 506 is executed by omitting the security check process in the case of activation due to the time-up of the watchdog timer 49a. It starts from the user mode to execute.

  In the startup process (main) accompanying the input of the system reset signal, first, the CPU 505 executes the security check process shown in FIG. 26 based on the security check program 506A read from the ROM 506 (Sa1). At this time, the main control unit 41 enters the security mode, and the game control user program stored in the ROM 506 is not yet executed.

  In the security check process, as shown in FIG. 26, first, a process for determining a time (security time) for controlling to the security mode is executed. At this time, the CPU 505 reads the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES stored in the program management area of the ROM 506 (Sa101). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value is “000” (Sa102).

  If the read value is determined to be “000” in Sa102, the steady set time is set to a predetermined fixed time (Sa103). Here, the steady setting time is a constant time component of the security time regardless of the number of executions of the security check process based on the occurrence of a system reset or the like (the number of times the main control unit 41 enters the security mode). The fixed time is an invariant time component determined in advance based on the specification of the main control unit 41 in the security time, and may be a minimum value that can be set as the security time, for example.

  If it is determined in Sa102 that the read value is other than “000”, the extension time selected according to the setting contents shown in FIG. The time is set (Sa104). In this way, when the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, the security time as the execution time of the security check process can be selected in advance in addition to the fixed time. It can be set to any one of a plurality of extension times.

  After executing one of the processes of Sa103 and Sa104, the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is read (Sa105). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value is “00” (Sa106).

  If the read value is determined to be “00” in Sa106, the steady setting time is set as the security time (Sa107). On the other hand, if it is determined that the read value is other than “00”, the variable set time determined corresponding to the read value is added to the steady set time and set as the security time (Sa108). . Here, the variable setting time is a time component that changes every time the security check process is executed, and the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is “01” (short). Mode) or “10” (long mode), and changes in different predetermined time ranges. For example, when the count value in a predetermined free-run counter is stored in the variable security time register built in the main control unit 41 when the system reset occurs, the variable security time register is stored in the processing of Sa108. By using the value as it is, or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value for a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function), the variable set time is random within a predetermined time range at each system reset. What is necessary is just to be determined so that it may change. Thus, when the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “00”, the security time that is the execution time of the security check process is set as the security based on the occurrence of the system reset or the like. Each time the check process is executed, it can be changed within a predetermined time range.

  Here, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, and the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is other than “00”. In this case, the security time is determined by adding both the extension time set in step Sa104 and the variable setting time set in step Sa108 to the fixed time. become.

  After executing one of the processes of Sa107 and Sa108, the security code stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 is read (Sa109). Here, in a predetermined area of the ROM 506, a security code of a calculation result obtained by calculating the data of the stored content by a predetermined calculation formula is stored in advance. As a security code generation method, for example, a hash value is generated using a hash function, an error detection code (CRC code) is used, or an error correction code (ECC code) is used. A generation method may be used. In a predetermined area different from the security code storage area of the ROM 506, an arithmetic expression for specifying the security code by calculation is encrypted and stored in advance.

  Following the processing of step Sa109, the encrypted arithmetic expression is decrypted and restored (Sa110). Thereafter, the storage code in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 is calculated by the arithmetic expression decrypted in Sa110 to specify the security code (Sa111). At this time, the storage data used for the calculation for specifying the security code is, for example, program data corresponding to all or part of the user program different from the security check program 506A among the storage data of the ROM 506, or predetermined table data May be all or a part of the fixed data constituting the. Then, the security code read in Sa109 is compared with the security code specified in Sa111 (Sa112). At this time, it is determined whether or not the security codes match in the comparison result (Sa113).

  If the security codes do not match at Sa113, it is determined that an unauthorized change has been made to the ROM 506, and the operation of the CPU 505 is shifted to the halt state (HALT). On the other hand, when the security codes match in Sa113, the first random number initial setting KRS1 and the second random number initial setting KRS2 stored in the program management area are read out, and the random number circuit setting process shown in FIG. Is executed (Sa114), the random number circuit abnormality inspection process shown in FIG. 28 is executed in order to check the presence / absence of operation abnormality in the random number circuit 509 (Sa115).

  In the random number circuit setting process shown in FIG. 27, first, setting for using the random number circuit 509 is performed based on the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (Sa201). In the present embodiment, the bit value in the bit number [3] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 is set to “1” in advance, and setting to use the random number circuit 509 is performed corresponding to this bit value. Subsequently, the random number update clock RGK in the random number circuit 509 is set based on the bit value in the bit number [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (Sa202). In the present embodiment, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 is determined in response to the bit value [2] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 being “1” in advance. Setting is performed by dividing the frequency by two to be the random number update clock RGK.

  After the setting in Sa202, the random number update rule is set in the random number circuit 509 based on the bit value [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1 (Sa203). In this embodiment, “10” is set in advance as the bit value in the bit number [1-0] of the first random number initial setting KRS1, and the random number update rule in the random number sequence RSN is automatically changed after the second round. Settings are made.

  Subsequently, based on the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, a start value at start-up in numerical data to be a random value is determined (Sa204). In this embodiment, “1” is set in advance as the bit value in the bit number [1] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, and the start value of the random number is set to a value based on the ID number.

  Further, based on the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2, it is set whether or not to change the start value of the numerical data to be a random value at every system reset (Sa205). In this embodiment, the bit value at the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “0” in advance, and the start value at start-up set in Sa204 is used as it is, and the start value in the random number circuit 509 is used. It is said. When the setting by the processing of Sa205 is completed, the random number circuit 509 starts a random value generation operation. When the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is set to “1” in advance, the random number start value is changed every time the system is reset. In this case, for example, when the count value in a predetermined free-run counter is stored in the random number start value register built in the main control unit 41 when the system reset occurs, the random number start is performed in the processing of Sa205. By using the stored value of the value register as it is, or by using the value obtained by substituting the stored value into a predetermined arithmetic function (for example, a hash function), the random number start value is predetermined at each system reset. (For example, a range including all or part of the numerical data included in the count value permutation RCN generated by the random number generation circuit 553) may be determined at random.

  Note that the setting by the random number circuit setting process may be performed autonomously by the random number circuit 509 based on the stored data in the program management area without the processing of the CPU 505 being involved. In this case, the random number circuit 509 may be configured not to perform initialization and not to generate a random value when the main control unit 41 is in the security mode. Then, when the CPU 505 reads the user program stored in the ROM 506 in the main control unit 41 and the user mode is started, for example, a control signal for instructing the initial setting to the random number circuit 509 is transmitted from the CPU 505. In response to the above, the random number generation operation may be started after the random number circuit 509 performs the initial setting. In particular, when the random number circuit 509 is externally attached to the main control unit 41, even when the main control unit 41 is in the security mode, the random number circuit 509 performs program management independently of the processing in the CPU 505. The random number generation operation may be started after initial setting based on the storage data of the area.

  In the random number circuit abnormality check process shown in FIG. 28, first, the random number clock abnormality determination counter is cleared, and the random number clock abnormality determination count value, which is the count value, is initialized to “0” (Sa301). Subsequently, the internal information data CIF4 stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF is read (Sa302). Then, it is determined whether or not the read value at Sa302 is “1”. At this time, if the frequency monitoring circuit 551 provided in the random number circuit 509 detects a frequency abnormality in the random number clock RCLK from the random number external clock terminal ERC, the bit value “1” is written as the internal information data CIF4. .

  Therefore, when the read value is determined to be “1” in Sa303, the random number clock abnormality determination count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (Sa304). At this time, it is determined whether or not the count value after the update in Sa304 has reached a predetermined clock abnormality determination value (Sa305). Here, the clock abnormality determination value may be a numerical value determined in advance in order to determine that the clock abnormality is detected when the frequency monitoring circuit 551 continuously detects the frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK. If the clock abnormality determination value has not been reached in Sa305, the processing returns to Sa302, and determination based on the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 is performed again.

  When the clock abnormality determination value is reached in Sa305, it is determined that the random number clock is not functioning normally, and the operation of the CPU 505 is shifted to the halt state (HALT).

  If the read value is determined to be “0” in Sa303, the random value abnormality determination counter is cleared, and the random value abnormality determination count value that is the count value is initialized to “0” (Sa306). In the process of Sa303, it is determined that the read value is “0” when the bit value of the internal information data CIF4 read in Sa302 becomes “0” continuously for a plurality of times (for example, twice). You may do it.

  Subsequent to the processing of Sa306, a check value used for checking whether there is an abnormality in the random number value is set to an initial value “0000H” (Sa307). Then, the stored numerical data as the random value is read out from the random value register 559A as the random value register R1D included in the random number circuit 509 (Sa308). For example, in the processing of Sa308, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS is set to “0”, and fetching of the random number value by software is designated. Subsequently, the bit value of the random value fetch specification data RDLT0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random value fetch specification register RDLT is set to “1”, and fetching to the random value register R1D is designated. Note that setting the bit value in the bit number [0] of the random value fetch specification register RDLT to “1” outputs a latch signal instructing the random number circuit 509 to fetch (latch) numerical data from the CPU 505. It corresponds to that. Thereafter, the numerical value data to be stored as the random number value may be read by turning on the register read signal RRS1 supplied to the random number value register R1D.

  After reading the numerical data in Sa308, the read value is set as the random number inspection reference value (Sa309). Subsequently, the numerical value data to be the random number value is further read from the random value register 559A (Sa310). Note that the read operation at Sa310 may be performed in the same procedure as the read operation at Sa308. In addition, a sufficient delay time may be provided between the read operation at Sa308 and the read operation at Sa310 because the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN generated by the random number circuit 509 changes. After the numerical data is read in Sa310, an exclusive OR operation between the random number inspection reference value and the read value in Sa310 is executed (Sa311). Further, a logical sum operation between the calculation result in Sa311 and the check value is executed, and the calculation result is updated to be a new check value (Sa312). For example, the check value may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 507, and each time the process of Sa312 is executed, the calculation result obtained by the process may be saved as a new check value. As a result, changes in all the bits in the numerical data read from the random value register 559A are recorded. If the bit has changed at least once during a plurality of readings, the corresponding bit value in the check value is “1”. "

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the check value is “FFFFH” (Sa 313), and if it is, since the change of the bit value is recognized for all the bits, it is determined that the random number value is normally updated. Then, the random number circuit abnormality inspection process ends. If it is confirmed that the random number value has been updated normally, the bit value of the random number latch selection data RDLS0 stored in the bit number [0] of the random number latch selection register RDLS is set to “1”. It is set to instruct the random number value fetching to the random value register R1D according to the signal input to the port P0. In this embodiment, a wiring for transmitting the game start signal SS1 from the start switch 7 is connected to the input port P0. Thereby, when the game start signal SS1 is turned on, the random number value can be taken into the random value register R1D.

  If the check value is determined to be other than “FFFFH” in Sa313, the random number abnormality determination count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (Sa314). At this time, it is determined whether or not the count value after the update in Sa314 has reached a predetermined random value abnormality determination value (Sa315). Here, if the random number circuit 509 is operating normally, the random value abnormality determination value is determined so that all the bits of the numerical data read from the random value register 559A are changed at least once. Any predetermined numerical value may be used. If the random value abnormality determination value has not been reached in Sa315, the process returns to the processing of Sa310, and determination for reading numerical data as a random value from the random number circuit 509 again and checking for abnormality is performed.

  When the random value abnormality determination value is reached in Sa315, it is determined that the random number clock is not functioning normally, and the operation of the CPU 505 is shifted to the stop state (HALT).

  The random number circuit abnormality inspection process is not limited to that executed by the CPU 505, and the random number circuit abnormality inspection process may be executed by a built-in circuit in the main control unit 41 other than the CPU 505. As an example, the random number circuit 509 has a function of executing a random number circuit abnormality inspection process. When a frequency abnormality of the random number clock RCLK is detected or when an abnormality of the random number value is detected, the CPU 505 May be notified. In addition, the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is not limited to that executed at the time of startup, and for example, every time a timer interrupt occurs in the main control unit 41, a part or all of the random number circuit abnormality inspection process is executed. Anyway.

  Returning to FIG. 26, after the random circuit setting process of Sa114 and the random circuit abnormality inspection process of Sa115, it is determined whether or not the security time set in the processes of Sa107 and Sa108 has elapsed (Sa116). At this time, if the security time has not elapsed, the processing of Sa116 is repeatedly executed and waits until the security time elapses. If it is determined in Sa116 that the security time has elapsed, the security check process is terminated, and the value of the program counter built in the CPU 505 is set to the start address (address 0000H) of the user program in the ROM 506. As a result, the operation state of the main control unit 41 shifts from the security mode to the user mode, and execution of the user program stored in the ROM 506 is started. As described above, at the time of start-up accompanying the input of the user reset signal, the user mode is started without going through the security mode.

  In the user mode, first, built-in devices such as the serial communication circuit 511, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa2), and then the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3). By initialization of the I register and the IY register, an interrupt table address to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and a reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 507 is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

Next, access to the RAM 507 is permitted (Sa4), and RAM parities of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 507 are calculated (Sa5). Next, the states of the stop switch 36 a and the automatic checkout switch 36 b are acquired, and after setting the stop function and the automatic checkout function to valid / invalid in a specific register of the main control unit 41 (Sa6) , the port input described later The input data of each switch acquired in the process, the confirmation data of each switch indicating that the previous and current input data are in the same state, and the edge data of each switch indicating that the previous and current determined data are different are each cleared (Sa7). Further, the power interruption flag indicating that a power failure has been detected is cleared (Sa8). Further, the value of the door monitoring timer for measuring the monitoring interval of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 and the history of the input state of the detection signal from the door opening detection switch 25 are cleared (Sa9), the operation detection command transmission request and the door are cleared. The command transmission request 2 is cleared and the door command transmission request 1 is set (Sa10).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the random number value is latched based on the value of the random number latch flag register, that is, whether or not the numerical value data is captured in the random number value register 559A (Sa11), and the random number value must be latched. If the random number value is latched in the Sa11 step, the random number value for internal lottery is read from the random value register 559A (Sa12), and the process proceeds to the Sa13 step. When the random number value for internal lottery is read from the random value register 559 in the step of Sa12, the random number latch flag register is cleared and new numerical data can be taken in. In the step of Sa12, although the random number value for internal lottery is read, the read random number value is not used, but as a dummy in order to make it possible to take in a new random value according to the operation of the start switch 7. It is to read.

  In step Sa13, it is determined whether the RAM parity calculated in step Sa5 is zero. If the power interruption interrupt processing (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa13, the data stored in the RAM 507 is not normal. In this case, after executing the initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas except the used stack area and the non-initialization area among the storage areas of the RAM 507 (Sa26), is the setting key switch 37 turned on? If the setting key switch 37 is on, a setting command indicating setting start is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa23), and the command stored in the command buffer is transmitted to the serial communication circuit 511. The command storage process 1 to be transferred to the transmission data register 561 is performed (Sa24), the interrupt is permitted (Sa25), and the setting change process is performed. , That is, the transition to the setting change state.

  In the command storage process 1 of Sa24, as shown in FIG. 29A, the first byte of command data stored in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sx1), and then the command buffer The second byte of the command data stored in is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sx2). The command data transferred to the transmission data register 561 is converted into serial data in the order of transfer to the transmission data register 561 as described above, stored in the transmission shift register 562, and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Will be.

  If the setting key switch 37 is off in step Sa24, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa28), an error command indicating RAM abnormality is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa29), and the command is stored. The process 1 is performed to transfer the error command in the command buffer to the transmission data register 561 (Sa30), the interrupt is permitted (Sa31), and the process proceeds to the error process, that is, the RAM abnormal error state.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa13, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa14). If the power interruption processing (main) is normally performed, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for failure diagnosis is not normal in step Sa14 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption) In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 507 is not normal. Therefore, the process proceeds to step Sa26 and initialization 1 is executed, and then the setting key switch 37 is turned on in step Sa27. For example, after generation of a setting command indicating the start of setting (Sa23) and command storage process 1 (Sa24), interrupt is permitted (Sa25), and the process proceeds to a setting change process. Also, if the setting key switch 37 is OFF in the step of Sa27, after setting an error code indicating a RAM abnormality (Sa28), generating an error command indicating a RAM abnormality (Sa29), and command storing process 1 (Sa30), The interrupt is permitted (Sa31), and the process proceeds to error processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa14 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 507 is normal, so the destructive diagnosis data is cleared (Sa15). After initialization 3 for initializing the used stack area (Sa16), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is on (Sa17). If the setting key switch 37 is on, the process proceeds to step Sa22. Initialize 1 is executed, a setting command indicating the start of setting is generated (Sa23), command storage process 1 (Sa24), interrupt is permitted (Sa25), and the process proceeds to a setting change process.

  If the setting key switch 37 is OFF in the step of Sa17, each register is restored to the state before power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa18), and a return command is generated and stored in the command buffer ( Sa19), the command storage process 1 is performed, the return command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sa20), the interrupt is permitted, Sa21), and the process executed last before the power interruption is returned. .

  As described above, in the start-up process, after the security mode is switched to the user mode only at the time of system reset, the security mode is omitted and the user mode is started at the time of user reset.

  In the security mode at the time of system reset, random number circuit setting processing for setting the random number circuit 509 is performed, and in the random number circuit setting processing, setting of a random number update rule, setting of a random number start value, and the like are performed. The security mode is omitted, and the user mode is started. For this reason, the initial value of the random number is reset at the time of system reset, whereas the random number circuit 509 is not set at the time of user reset, and the numerical data that becomes the random number is continuously updated as it was before the reset. Will be. Also, interrupts are not permitted during security mode, and interrupts are permitted after shifting to user mode. Therefore, when resetting the system, before interrupts are permitted, The random number circuit 509 is set.

  Regardless of whether the reset is a system reset or a user reset, first, after the access to the RAM 507 is permitted, all the storage areas (unused areas and unused stacks) of the RAM 507 are processed without performing other processes. Before the determination of whether the stored data is normal or not from the calculated RAM parity, it is necessary to perform the same regardless of whether the stored data of the RAM 507 is normal or not. As a certain process, setting of enabling / disabling of stop function, automatic settlement function, input data of each switch, finalized data, clearing of edge data, clearing of power-off flag, detection interval of detection state of door opening detection switch 25 are set. The value of the door monitoring timer to be counted, the history of the input state of the detection signal from the door opening detection switch 25, the door command transmission request 2 Rear and door command transmission request 1 setting, read the random number from the random number register 559a, a do, then the data stored in the RAM507 is adapted to make a determination of whether normal or not based on the RAM parity.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control contents of error processing executed by the main control unit 41.

  In the error processing, first, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2), and the error code is stored in the RAM. It is determined whether or not it is an abnormal error (Sb3). If the error code indicates a RAM abnormal error, the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code does not indicate a RAM abnormal error, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is generated, stored in the command buffer (Sb4), and interrupts are prohibited. In the meantime, command storage processing 2 is performed to transfer the command stored in the command buffer to the transmission data register 561 of the serial communication circuit 511, and the error command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sb5).

  In the command storage process 2 of Sb5, as shown in FIG. 29B, first, prohibition of interrupt is set (Sx11), execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited, and then stored in the command buffer. The first byte of the command data is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sx12), and then the second byte of the command data stored in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Sx13). ) When the transfer is completed, the interrupt is permitted (Sx14) and the process is terminated. The command data transferred to the transmission data register 561 is converted into serial data in the order of transfer to the transmission data register 561 as described above, stored in the transmission shift register 562, and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Will be.

  As described above, in the command storing process 2, the interrupt is prohibited from the stage before starting the command transfer of the first byte to the stage until the command transfer of the second byte is completed. Execution of interrupt processing (main) is prohibited.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an on change is detected from the reset / setting switch 38 off (Sb6). If no on change is detected from the reset / setting switch 38 off, the reset switch 23 is further turned off. It is determined whether or not a change in on is detected (Sb7). If no change in on is detected from off of the reset switch 23, the process returns to step Sb6. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until a change of on from the off of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  If a change from on to off of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in step Sb6 or a change from on to off from the reset switch 23 is detected in step Sb7, the switch detection state is changed. Edge data indicating that it has changed from off to on or that it has changed from on to off (referred to as a rising edge when it changes from off to on, and as a falling edge when it changes from on to off) Clear (Sb8), clear the error code stored in the register (Sb9), return the display state of the auxiliary game display 12 to the display state saved in the stack in the step of Sb1 (Sb10), Generate an error command indicating the cancellation and store it in the command buffer ( b11), after transferring the error command in the command buffer to the transmit data register 561 performs command storage processing 2 (Sb12), it returns to the original processing.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is not due to the RAM abnormality, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated to return to the original processing even if the error state is canceled. In the case of error processing due to an abnormality, even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated, the error state is canceled and the original state is not restored.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the control content of the setting change process executed by the main control unit 41.

  In the setting change process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 507 is read out, and the read value is set as a display value (Sc1), and whether or not the display value is out of a settable range (1 to 6). (Sc2), if the display value is within the settable range, the process proceeds to step Sc4. If the display value is outside the settable range, the display value is corrected to 1, and the process proceeds to step Sc5.

  In the step of Sc5, after the display value is displayed on the setting value display 24, the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 are turned off to wait for detection of an on change (Sc5, Sc6). When a change from on to off of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected, the edge data is cleared (Sc9), the display value is incremented by 1 (Sc10), and the process returns to the step Sc2.

  Further, when a change from on to off of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc6, the edge data is cleared (Sc9), and the other switches are turned on by referring to finalized data to be described later. (Sc10), if any switch is in the on state, the process returns to the step of Sc5, and if any switch is not in the on state, the value displayed on the set value display 24 is set to 0. (Sc11), and waits until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc12).

  When the setting key switch 37 is turned off in the step of Sc11, the display value is stored in the setting value work (Sc13), and the setting command indicating the end of setting and the new setting value is generated and stored in the command buffer. Then, the command storage process 2 is performed to transfer the setting command in the command buffer to the transmission data register 561 (Sc15), and the process proceeds to the game process.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the main control unit 41.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where a bet number can be set, and a process for starting a game when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state and the start switch 7 is operated is executed. .

  In the internal lottery process in the step of Sd2, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is allowed based on the internal lottery random value latched simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in the step of Sd1. Process. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 507 based on each lottery result.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  In the game process, a command is generated in accordance with the progress control of the game, set in the command buffer, and immediately after executing the command storage process 2, the command stored in the command buffer is transmitted to the serial communication circuit 511. The data is transferred to the register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  33 to 35 are flowcharts showing the control content of the BET process executed by the main control unit 41 in step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 507 is cleared (Se1), a specified number corresponding to the gaming state is set in the RAM 507 (Se2), and the RAM 507 is a replay game. Whether or not the game is a replay game is determined on the basis of whether or not the replay game flag indicating is set (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, a BET command indicating that 3 bets have been added is generated and stored in the command buffer (Se4), and command storage processing 2 is performed. The BET command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Se5), the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se6), and the specified number of bets set in the RAM 507 is referred to. It is determined whether or not the number is a specified number, that is, whether or not the number of bets serving as a game start condition is set (Se7). If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the process returns to the step of Se6, If the value is the specified number, a insertion impossible flag indicating that the medal cannot be inserted is set in the RAM 507 (Se8), and the process proceeds to Step Se10.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, settings before waiting to be made are performed (Se9), and the process proceeds to step Se10. In the setting before waiting for insertion, the insertion disable flag set in the RAM 507 is cleared, and a medal can be inserted.

  In the step of Se10, it is determined whether or not an error code is set in the register, that is, whether or not an error is detected. If an error code is set, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If no error code is set in the step of Se10, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 507 (Se11). When it is determined in step Se11 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. (Se12), the process proceeds to step Se14, and if it is determined that the medal cannot be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se13), and the process proceeds to the step Se14.

  In the step of Se14, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is on. If the setting key switch 37 is on, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se15). If the value of the BET counter is 0 in step Se15, a setting confirmation command indicating the start of setting confirmation is generated and stored in the command buffer (Se16), and the command storage process 2 is performed to confirm the setting in the command buffer. The command is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Se17), and the setting confirmation processing (Se18), that is, the setting confirmation state is entered. After the setting confirmation process in the step Se18 is completed, the process returns to the step Se10.

  If the setting key switch 37 is not on in step Se14 or if the value of the BET counter is not 0 in step Se15, the process proceeds to step Se19, and whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. That is, it is determined whether or not there is a inserted medal flag indicating that the passage of the inserted medal is detected. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se19, the process proceeds to the step of Se31, and if the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the inserted medal flag is cleared (Se20), and the non-insertable flag is set in the RAM 507. Whether or not a medal can be inserted is determined based on whether or not a medal can be inserted (Se21). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se31.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se21, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 507 is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se22), If the value is not the specified number, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se23), a BET command indicating that the bet number is incremented by 1 is generated and stored in the command buffer (Se24), and the command storage process 2 is executed. Then, the BET command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Se25), and the process returns to the step of Se9.

  If the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number in the step of Se22, the credit counter value in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 507 is incremented by 1 (Se26), and a credit command indicating the current credit counter value is generated. The command is stored in the command buffer (Se27), command storage processing 2 is performed, the credit command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 (Se28), and whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value is determined. If the credit counter value is not 50, the process returns to the Se9 step. If the credit counter value is 50, the insertion disable flag is set in the RAM 507 (Se30), and the process returns to the Se9 step.

  In step Se31, it is determined whether or not a change from on to off of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating a rising edge of the start switch 7 is set.

  If it is determined in step Se31 that no change from on to off of the start switch 7 has been detected, the process proceeds to step Se49, and if a change from on to off in the start switch 7 is detected, an interrupt will occur. Is prohibited (Se32), the edge data is cleared (Se33), and it is determined whether or not another switch is on based on finalized data described later (Se34). If interrupt is permitted (Se35), the process returns to the step of Se9.

  If none of the other switches are in the on state in step Se34, the bet number that is set in the RAM 507 is further referred to and the BET counter value is the specified number, that is, a bet that becomes a game start condition. It is determined whether or not the number is set (Se36).

  If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number in the step of Se36, the interrupt is permitted (Se35), and the process returns to the step of Se9. If the value of the BET counter is the specified number, the value of the random number storage work is internally stored. A random value for lottery is set in a lottery work (Se37), interrupt is permitted (Se38), an unloadable flag is set in the RAM 507, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the flow path of the medal Is set to be set at the start of the game (Se40). Then, after the step of Se40, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  After the change of the start switch 7 from off to on is detected in this way, it is determined that the operation of the start switch 7 is invalid or valid, and the value of the random value storage work is set as the lottery work. In the meantime, interrupts are prohibited and timer interrupt processing (main) is executed during this period to prevent rewriting of the random value storage work value. .

  In step Se49, it is determined whether or not a change from on to off of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rising of the MAXBET switch 6 is set. If a change of on from the off of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se49, the process proceeds to a step of Se58, and if a change of on from the off of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the edge data is cleared (Se50). Referring to the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 507, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se51). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se51, the process proceeds to the step of Se55, and if the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se52). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step Se55. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se52, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se53), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se54), and the process returns to the step of Se51. In the step of Se55, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has been added. If the BET counter has not been added, the process returns to the step of Se9, and if the BET counter has been added, the bet number is added by the added number. A BET command indicating that it has been generated is generated and stored in the command buffer (Se56), command storage processing 2 is performed to transfer the BET command in the command buffer to the transmission data register 561 (Se57), and the process returns to the step of Se9. .

In the step of Se58, it is determined whether or not a change from on to off of the settlement switch 10 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rise of the settlement switch 10 is set. If the change of on from the off of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se58, the process returns to the step of Se9, and if the change of on from the off of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the edge data is cleared (Se59). Then, based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 507, it is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se60), and if the game is a replay game, the process returns to Se9. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se60, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se61). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se63, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 507 (Se62), and the process proceeds to Step Se63. In Se63 step, they were used in the hopper motor 34 b drives the pay out the credit counter or medals value amount stored in the BET counter control, that medals or betting amount set is stored as a credit medal Settlement process is performed in which the control to return is performed. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se63, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 507 is cleared (Se64), and the process returns to the step of Se9.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the control content of the internal lottery process executed by the main control unit 41 in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process, first, the value of the gaming state flag stored in the RAM 507 is referred to determine whether or not the current gaming state is BB (RB) (Sf1), and is in BB (RB). If it is determined, the table number of the lottery table for BB (RB) in which the target combination of the internal lottery in BB (RB) and the number of determination values is stored is set (Sf2), and the process proceeds to step Sf10.

  If it is determined in step Sf1 that the current gaming state is not BB (RB), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is RB (RB that shifts from normal) (Sf3), and RB is in progress. Is determined, the table number of the RB lottery table in which the target combination of the internal lottery in RB and the number of determination values thereof are stored is set (Sf4), and the process proceeds to step Sf10.

  If it is determined in step Sf3 that the current gaming state is not RB, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is internal 1 (Sf5). If it is determined that internal 1 is internal, Set the table number of the lottery table for internal 1 in which the internal lottery target role and the number of judgment values are stored in the middle (the state where BB1, BB3, RB2, which will be described later among the special roles are won) (Sf6) ), Go to step Sf10.

  If it is determined in step Sf5 that the current gaming state is not internal one, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is internal two (Sf7). If it is determined that the internal state is two, Set the table number of the lottery table for internal 2 in which the internal lottery target role and the number of judgment values are stored in the inside (the state where BB2, BB4, RB1, which will be described later among the special roles are won) The process proceeds to steps Sf8) and Sf10.

  When it is determined in step Sf7 that the current gaming state is not 2 in the inside, that is, when it is normal, the RT flag value stored in the RAM 507 is referred to and the RT type specified from the value is determined. Accordingly, a table number corresponding to the corresponding RT type is set from the table number of the normal lottery table in which the target combination of internal lottery and the number of determination values are stored for each RT type, and the step of Sf10 is performed. move on.

  In the step of Sf10, the number of determination values according to the number of bets and the set value is acquired from the lottery table of the table number set in any of Sf2, Sf4, Sf6, Sf8, Sf9, After performing the lottery process for determining whether or not the winning combination is won based on the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 37 and 38 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 by interrupting and executing the activation process and the game process at regular intervals (0.56 ms interval). Note that other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (main).

  In the timer interrupt process (main), first, a register in use is saved in the stack area (Sk1), and then a power failure determination process is performed. In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48. If a voltage drop signal is input, whether or not the voltage drop signal is input in the previous power failure determination process as well. If a voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power interruption flag indicating that is set.

  After the power failure determination process in the step of Sk2, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is set (Sk3). If the power interruption flag is not set, the process proceeds to Sk4 and the power interruption flag is set The process proceeds to a power interruption process (main) described later.

  In step Sk4, port input processing for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port is performed.

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sk5). In the step of Sk5, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sk6). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sk10 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sk23 described later is executed (Sk7).

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether or not it is 1, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sk8). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, the reel motor Reel starting process (Sk9) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step process (Sk10) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, motor phase signal standby processing (Sk11) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a predetermined time has been sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sk25.

  In the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sk8, LED dynamic display processing (Sk12) for dynamically lighting various indicators, and output processing of control signals and the like for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port (Sk13), a time counter update process (Sk14) for updating various time counters, a door monitoring process (Sk15) for monitoring the detection state of the door open detection switch 25, a door command transmission request, etc., a door command and an operation detection command The command transmission process (Sk16) for performing transfer to the serial communication circuit 511 and the like and the external output signal update process (Sk17) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sk25.

  If it is timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 in the step of Sk6, it is further determined by referring to the counter value for branching whether it is 3, that is, timer interrupt 4 (Sk18). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, if it is timer interrupt 3, the passing of the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (pass of the reel reference position) is checked, and the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected and stopped. Check if the preparation is complete (whether the stop preparation completion code is set). If the stop preparation is complete and the motor is rotating at a constant speed, operate the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel. Processing to pass through origin (Sk19), determination of whether or not the detection state of switches has changed, switch input determination processing to perform operation detection command transmission request, etc. (Sk20), random number value After executing random number reading process to be stored in the random number storing work the (SK21) sequentially reads numeric data from Staphylococcus R1D, the process proceeds to step Sk25.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sk18, the stop stored in the work on the stop reel is stored when the stop operation position is stored in the work on the stop reel in accordance with the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. A stop switch process (Sk22) for calculating the stop position after determining the stop position from the operation position and counting the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is reached, and it is time to stop A stop process (Sk23) for starting braking by two-phase excitation and a final stop process (Sk24) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start of braking in the stop process are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sk25.

  In the step of Sk25, the register saved in the stack area in Sk1 is restored, and the processing before the interruption is returned.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed by interrupting the basic process at regular intervals, and the process counter is updated each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. In addition to distributing the load required for one timer interrupt process (main), the power interruption condition based on the voltage drop signal regardless of the process counter value. A power failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the power failure is satisfied.If the power interruption condition is satisfied, the power interruption processing is performed. Disconnection processing can be performed.

  In the timer interrupt process (main), it is determined whether or not the power interruption condition is satisfied. If the power interruption condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the power interruption process. Since interruptions due to power interruptions do not occur during execution of interrupt processing (main), interruption processing can be interrupted during execution of timer interruption processing (main), or timer interruption processing (main) Since it is not necessary to wait for the end of the interruption to perform an interruption process associated with power interruption, the process associated with establishment of the power interruption condition is not complicated.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control content of the switch input determination process executed by the main control unit 41 in the timer interrupt 3 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the switch input determination process, the input data of each switch acquired in the port input process is updated (Sk101), and it is determined whether the detection state indicated by the previous input data is the same as the detection state indicated by the current input data. If the determination is made (Sk102) and the detection state indicated by the previous input data is not the same as the detection state indicated by the current input data, the flow returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the step of Sk102, when the detection state indicated by the previous input data is the same as the detection state indicated by the current input data, that is, when the same detection state is indicated for 2.24 ms, the determined data of the corresponding switch. Is updated (Sk103), and the process proceeds to Step S104. In step Sk103, the current confirmed data is moved to the previous confirmed data, and the detection state indicated by the input data determined to be the same as the previous time is set as the current confirmed data.

  In step Sk104, it is determined whether or not the previous confirmed data after the update and the current confirmed data are the same. If the previous confirmed data and the current confirmed data are the same for all the switches, the edge data is determined. Clear (Sk105) and return to the flowchart of FIG.

  In any one of the switches in Sk104, if the previous confirmed data and the current confirmed data are not the same in any one switch, it is determined whether the switch in which the previous confirmed data and the current confirmed data are different from off to on. (Sk106) If there is no switch changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step Sk108. If there is a switch changed from off to on, a rising edge indicating that the corresponding switch has changed from off to on is set. (Sk107), the process proceeds to step Sk108.

  In the step of Sk108, it is determined whether or not the switch in which the final confirmed data and the final confirmed data have changed from on to off, and if there is no switch changed from on to off, the process proceeds to Sk110, and changes from on to off. If there is a switch, a falling edge indicating that the corresponding switch has changed from on to off is set (Sk109), and the process proceeds to Step S110.

  In the step of Sk110, it is determined whether or not there is a switch in which the previous finalized data and the current finalized data are the same. If there is no switch in which the previous finalized data and the current finalized data are the same, the process proceeds to the step of Sk112. If there is a switch in which the previous fixed data and the current fixed data are the same, only the edge data of the corresponding switch is cleared (Sk111), and the process proceeds to Step Sk112.

  In Sk112, an operation detection command transmission request is set, a switch whose detection state has changed (a switch for which edge data is set), whether the switch has changed from off to on, or from on to off (rising edge) Or a falling edge), an operation detection command storage area (operation) assigned to the RAM 507 by generating an operation detection command indicating a detection state (on / off) of another switch (a switch whose detection state has not changed). The operation detection command is temporarily stored until the detection command is transmitted (Sk113), thereby instructing the transmission of the operation detection command, and then the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the control content of the random number reading process executed by the main control unit 41 in the timer interrupt 3 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the random value reading process, it is determined whether or not the numerical data is latched based on the value of the random number latch flag register, that is, whether or not the numerical data is taken into the random value register 559A (Sk201). If not latched, the random number reading process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the numerical data is latched in the step of Sk201, the numerical data is read from the random value register 559A (Sk202), and the value stored in the random value storage work is updated to the numerical data read in Sk202 (Sk203). The random number reading process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When numerical data is read from the random value register 559 in the step of Sk202, the random number latch flag register is cleared, and the new numerical data is allowed to be taken into the random value register 559.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the door monitoring process executed by the main control unit 41 in the timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the door monitoring process, first, a history of the input state of the door opening detection switch 25 (a value obtained by continuing to logically OR the determination state of the positive detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the port input process for about 100 ms). The door sensor history is updated (Sk301). That is, a logical sum of the positive detection signal detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 and the door sensor history is taken as a new door sensor history.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the door monitoring timer is 0, that is, whether or not about 100 ms has elapsed since the previous monitoring (Sk302). If the value of the door monitoring timer is not 0, the value of the door monitoring timer is set. 1 is subtracted (Sk303), the door monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the door monitoring timer is 0 in the step of Sk302, 44 is set as the value of the door monitoring timer (Sk304), and a new time measurement of 100 ms is started. After the door sensor history is acquired in the register and the door sensor history in the RAM 507 is cleared (Sk305), the door open detection switch 25 indicated by the door sensor history acquired in the register and the door command storage area (door) assigned to the RAM 507 are displayed. This is an area where the door command is temporarily stored until the command is transmitted, and is updated to a door command indicating a new detection state when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes). The detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command is compared to determine whether or not there is a change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (Sk306).

  If there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 in the step of Sk306, whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set, that is, the door command transmission is requested when the main control unit 41 is activated or the game is ended. (Sk307), and if the door command transmission request 1 is not set, the door monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  When there is a change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 in the step of Sk306, or when the door command transmission request 1 is set in the step of Sk307, the door command transmission request 1 is cleared and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set (Sk308), and a door command based on the acquired door sensor history (detected state of the door open detection switch 25 after the change) is generated and stored in the door command storage area (Sk309). After instructing the transmission of the door command, the door monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the command transmission process executed by the main control unit 41 in the timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the command transmission process, first, if the serial communication circuit 511 is not transmitting a command, it is determined whether the door command transmission request 2 is set, that is, whether the transmission of the door command is instructed (Sk401).

  When the door command transmission request 2 is set in the step of Sk401, the door command transmission request 2 is cleared (Sk402), the door command set in the door command storage area is read and stored in the command buffer ( (Sk403), command storage processing 1 is performed to transfer the door command in the command buffer to the transmission data register 561 (Sk407), and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the door command transmission request 2 is not set in the step of Sk401, it is determined whether or not an operation detection command transmission request is set, that is, whether or not an operation detection command transmission is instructed (Sk404). .

  If the operation detection command transmission request is not set in the step of Sk404, the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 37, and if the operation detection command transmission request is set, the operation detection command transmission request is cleared ( Sk405), the operation detection command set in the operation detection command storage area is read and stored in the command buffer (Sk406), command storage processing 1 is performed, and the operation detection command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561. (Sk407), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the door command transmission request 2 is not set in the step of Sk402, it is determined whether or not an operation detection command transmission request is set, that is, whether or not an operation detection command transmission is instructed (Sk405). .

  If the operation detection command transmission request is not set in step Sk405, the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 37. If the operation detection command transmission request is set, the operation detection command transmission request is cleared ( (Sk406), the operation detection command set in the operation detection command storage area is read out and stored in the command buffer (Sk407), command storage processing is performed, and the operation detection command in the command buffer is transferred to the transmission data register 561 ( Sk408), the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the power interruption process (main) executed when the main control unit 41 determines that the power interruption flag is set in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the power interruption process (main), first, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sm1). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sm2), and all output ports are initialized (Sm3). Next, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 507 becomes 0 (Sm4), and access to the RAM 507 is performed. Prohibited (Sm5).

  Thereafter, the CPU 505 is stopped due to a decrease in voltage, or a user reset signal is input to restart the system. In this standby state, it is determined whether or not the random number value is latched based on the value of the random number latch flag register, that is, whether or not numerical data is taken into the random number value register 559A (Sm6), and the random number value is latched. If it is, the random number value for internal lottery is read from the random value register 559A (Sm7), and no other processing is performed. When the random number value for internal lottery is read from the random number value register 559 in the step of Sm7, the random number latch flag register is cleared and new numerical data is taken in. In the step of Sm7, although the random number value for internal lottery is read, the read random number value is not used, but it is used as a dummy so that a new random value can be taken in according to the operation of the start switch 7. It is to read.

  When the voltage drops in this standby state, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted. Further, in this standby state, when the user reset signal is input without the voltage being lowered, the above-described activation process (main) is executed from the user mode, and if the stored data in the RAM 507 is normal, the process returns to the original process. Will be.

  In this embodiment, after prohibiting access to the RAM 507, it is monitored whether or not the random number value is latched, and when the random number value is latched, processing other than the process of reading the latched random value is performed. Although there is no configuration, it is also possible to monitor the output status of the voltage drop signal, determine the voltage recovery when the voltage drop signal is not input, and start the program from the user mode of the startup process (main) good.

  Regardless of whether the reset is a system reset or a user reset, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment first performs all the storage areas of the RAM 507 without performing other processes after the access to the RAM 507 is permitted. Before calculating the RAM parity of the RAM 507 (including the unused area and the unused stack area) and then determining whether the stored data is normal from the calculated RAM parity, it is determined whether the stored data in the RAM 507 is normal. Regardless of this, processing that needs to be performed in common is performed, and then it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 507 is normal based on the RAM parity.

  For this reason, processing that needs to be performed in common regardless of whether the stored data in the RAM 507 is normal or not is executed separately when the stored data in the RAM 507 is determined to be normal and when it is determined to be abnormal. Since it is not necessary, the capacity of the program used for processing at the time of activation can be reduced.

  In addition, after the main control unit 41 is activated, after the access to the RAM 507 is permitted, the RAM parity is calculated before other processing is performed, so the state before any access to the RAM 507 is performed. Since it is determined whether the stored data is normal based on the calculated RAM parity, it is possible to improve the reliability of the determination of whether the data is normal.

  In the power interruption process, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the RAM parity based on all the data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 507 becomes 0, and the RAM 507 is restored at the time of restoration. It is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 507 is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas including the unused area and the unused stack area is 0. Therefore, the determination can be performed accurately and easily, and even if an illegal program or data is stored in an unused area or an unused stack area, the illegal program or data is restored while being stored. Can be prevented.

  In addition, after calculating the RAM parity and before determining whether or not the stored data is normal from the calculated RAM parity, the RAM 507 is stored in the RAM 507 as a common process regardless of whether or not the stored data is normal. Each switch input data, confirmation data, edge data, that is, data indicating the detection status of each switch is cleared, and the data in the RAM 507 is normal when the main control unit 41 is started. Whether returning to the control state or not returning to the previous control state, it is possible to immediately start checking the detection state of the switch after the interruption is permitted.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CPU 505 reads the security check program 506A stored in the ROM 506 or the like when the system is reset, that is, when a system reset signal is input upon power-on. By executing, it becomes a security mode.

  At this time, a security check process is executed as a process corresponding to the security check program 506A. Here, the security time when the main control unit 41 enters the security mode is stored in advance in the bit number [2-0] or the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES stored in the program management area of the ROM 506. Depending on the bit value, a time component different from the fixed time can be included.

  For example, if the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “000”, it can be selected in advance in addition to the fixed time corresponding to the setting contents shown in FIG. Any one of a plurality of extended times can be set as a time component included in the security time. If the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES is a value other than “00”, the system reset or power-on is performed corresponding to the short mode or the long mode shown in FIG. A variable setting time that changes in a predetermined time range each time is performed can be set as a time component included in the security time.

  Until the security time set in this way elapses, the execution of the user program stored in the ROM 506 is not started. Then, the operation of generating numerical data to be a random number value by the random number circuit 509 may not be started during the period in which the main control unit 41 is in the security mode. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing by system reset such as power-on. By connecting the “board” and inputting an illegal signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent acts such as illegally winning a special role.

  As an example, the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES is set to a different value for each model of the slot machine 1. In this case, the extension time of the security mode can be made different for each model of the slot machine 1, and it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 from the operation start timing of the slot machine 1. Further, by setting the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES to “01” or “10”, the variable setting time can be varied for each system reset. This makes it extremely difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 from the operation start timing of the slot machine 1.

  FIG. 44 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the random number circuit 509 built in the main control unit 41. FIG. 44A shows a control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 mounted on the game control board 40. FIG. 44B shows the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43. As shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B, the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK and the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK are different from each other. It does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency.

As shown in FIG. 44B, the random number clock RCLK rises from a low level to a high level at timings T10, T11, T12,. The random number clock RCLK is supplied to the random number external clock terminal ERC of the main control unit 41 and is input to the clock terminal CK in the clock flip-flop 552 provided in the random number circuit 509 shown in FIG. The clock flip-flop 552 responds to the rising edge of the random number clock RCLK input to the clock terminal CK with the latch clock RC0 fed back from the negative phase output terminal (inverted output terminal) Q bar to the D input terminal. Are taken in (latched) and output as a random number update clock RGK from the positive phase output terminal (non-inverted output terminal) Q. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 44C, the random number update clock RGK rises from the low level to the high level at the timings T10, T12, T14,..., And is half the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK. The signal has an oscillation frequency. For example, if the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK is 20 MHz, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK is 10 MHz. Then, since the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK is not even 1 to an integer multiple of an integer fraction of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK is the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK Have different frequencies. The random number generation circuit 553 updates the numerical data in the count value permutation RCN in response to, for example, the rising edge of the random number update clock RGK. The random number sequence change circuit 555 changes the numerical data update order in the count value permutation RCN output from the random number generation circuit 553 based on the setting of the random number update rule by the random number sequence change setting circuit 556 as a random number sequence RSN. Output. Thus, the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is updated in response to the rising edge of the random number update clock RGK, for example, as shown in FIG.

Thus, the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 112.
And the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 are different from each other, and one oscillation frequency does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency. Therefore, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK and the latch clock RC0 generated by the clock flip-flop 552 of the random number circuit 509 is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK, but the oscillation of the control clock CCLK. The frequency and the oscillation frequency of the internal system clock SCLK that is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK are different. Thus, synchronization between the control clock CCLK, the internal system clock SCLK, and the random number update clock RGK is prevented, and the random number circuit 509 generates the random number circuit 553 and the random number sequence change circuit 555 from the operation timing of the CPU 505. It becomes difficult to specify the update timing of the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN to be performed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the update operation of the numerical data serving as the random number value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505.

Furthermore, the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, to compare the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK, when monitors whether both oscillation frequencies are synchronized, both the oscillation frequency is synchronized random number It is preferable to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the input state of the update clock PGK and disable the progress of the game, and in this way, an abnormality has occurred in the update operation of numerical data that is a random value Thus, it is possible to prevent the progress control of the game from being performed.

  The latch clock RC0 output from the clock flip-flop 552 is an inverted signal of the random number update clock RGK, the oscillation frequency is the same as the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK, and its phase is the same as the phase of the random number update clock RGK and π It differs by (= 180 °). The latch clock RC0 is branched into a latch clock RC1 and a latch clock RC2 at a branch point BR1. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 44E, each of the latch clocks RC0, RC1, and RC2 becomes an oscillation signal whose signal state changes in a common cycle. The latch clock RC1 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557A. The latch clock RC2 is input to the clock terminal CK of the latch flip-flop 557B.

  Thus, the oscillation frequencies of the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 generated by branching the latch clock RC0 are different from the oscillation frequencies of the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK. Therefore, the control clock CCLK, the internal system clock SCLK, and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 are prevented from being synchronized, and the random number circuit 509 takes in numerical data as a random value from the operation timing of the CPU 505. It becomes difficult to specify the timing. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the operation of fetching numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505.

  In response to the rising edge of the latch clock RC1, the latch flip-flop 557A takes in (latches) the game start signal SS1 transmitted from the start switch 7 and supplied to the input port P0, and latches the game start signal. Output from the output terminal Q as SL1. If the fetching method in random number latch selector 558A is designated as signal input to input port P0, game start latch signal SL1 is output as random number latch signal LL1. Thereby, for example, the game start signal SS1 whose signal state changes between the off state (low level) and the on state (high level) at the timing shown in FIG. 44F is the timing T11 when the latch clock RC1 rises. After being fetched into the latching flip-flop 557A at T13, T15,. And output from the random number latch selector 558A.

  The random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D responds to the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 in response to the rising edge of the random number latch signal LL1 input from the random number latch selector 558A to the clock terminal. Then, the numerical data serving as stored data is updated (latched).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (G), when a rising edge is generated at which the random number latch signal LL1 changes from the OFF state to the ON state at timing T11, the random number sequence changing circuit 555 outputs the timing R11. As shown in FIG. 44H, the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN is taken into the random value register R1D and acquired as the numerical data that becomes the random value. Accordingly, the random value register 559A serving as the random value register R1D can acquire and store numerical data used as a random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start switch 7.

  In this manner, the latch flip-flop 557A takes in (latches) the game start signal SS1 transmitted from the start switch 7 and supplied to the input port P0 in response to the rising edge of the latch clock RC1. The start latch signal SL1 is output from the output terminal Q. At this time, regardless of whether the operation of the start switch 7 is valid or not, the game start transmitted from the start switch 7 and supplied to the input port P0 is started. The signal SS1 is captured (latched), and output from the output terminal Q as a game start latch signal SL1, and accordingly, the random number latch selector 558A receives the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555. The numerical value of the random value register 559A that becomes the random value register R1D is latched. It is adapted to update the data. That is, the latch flip-flop 557A only needs to detect the rise of the start switch 7 regardless of whether or not the operation of the start switch 7 is in a valid state, and thus the detection circuit for the signal that triggers the latch has a simple configuration. it can.

  Further, if the bit value in the bit number [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 as shown in FIG. 9B is “1”, for example, numerical data that becomes a random value generated by the random number circuit 509 is displayed. The start value can be changed at every system reset. Thereby, even if the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 can be specified, it becomes difficult to specify the numerical data read from the random value register 559A included in the random number circuit 509, and based on the analysis result of the program By connecting a so-called “hanging board” and inputting a fraud signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent an act such as illegally winning a special role.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by setting the bit value in the bit number [4-3] of the security time setting KSES to a value other than “00”, it changes within a predetermined time range every time the system is reset due to power-on or the like. The variable setting time to be set can be set as a time component included in the security time. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to the system reset caused by power-on or the like. By connecting the “hanging board” and inputting an illegal signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent an act such as illegally winning a special role.

  Also, by setting the bit value in the bit number [2-0] of the security time setting KSES to a value other than “000”, any one of a plurality of extension times that can be selected in advance in addition to the fixed time is set as the security time. It can be set as an included time component. As a result, it becomes difficult to specify the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 or the numerical data to be updated from the operation start timing due to the system reset caused by power-on or the like. By connecting the “hanging board” and inputting an illegal signal at a predetermined timing, it is possible to reliably prevent an act such as illegally winning a special role.

  Further, the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43 and the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 are different from each other. The oscillation frequency does not become an integral multiple of the other oscillation frequency. Therefore, the oscillation frequency of the random number update clock RGK and the latch clock RC0 generated by the clock flip-flop 552 of the random number circuit 509 is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the random number clock RCLK, but the oscillation of the control clock CCLK. The frequency and the oscillation frequency of the internal system clock SCLK that is ½ of the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK are different. In this way, the control clock CCLK, the internal system clock SCLK, and the random number update clock RGK are prevented from being synchronized. From the operation timing of the CPU 505, the random number circuit 509 generates the random number generation circuit 553 and the random number sequence change circuit 555. It becomes difficult to specify the update timing of the numerical data in the random number sequence RSN to be performed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the update operation of the numerical data serving as the random number value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505. Also, the oscillation frequencies of the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 generated by branching the latch clock RC0 are different from the oscillation frequencies of the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK. In this way, synchronization between the control clock CCLK and the internal system clock SCLK and the latch clocks RC1 and RC2 is prevented, and the random number circuit 509 takes in numeric data as a random value from the operation timing of the CPU 505. It becomes difficult to specify the timing. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming and the like based on the result of analyzing the operation of fetching numerical data as a random value in the random number circuit 509 from the operation timing of the CPU 505.

  The random number circuit 509 built in or externally attached to the main control unit 41 outputs from the random number generation circuit 553 in response to the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 being “1”. The start value of the numerical data in the count value permutation RCN and the random number sequence RSN output from the random number sequence change circuit 555 can be changed every time the system is reset. Thereby, even if the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 can be specified, it becomes difficult to specify the numerical data read from the random value register 559A included in the random number circuit 509, and based on the analysis result of the program It is possible to surely prevent an aiming signal or an illegal signal from being input by connecting a so-called “hanging board”.

  In the external bus interface 501 provided in the main control unit 41, the internal resource access control circuit 501A restricts external reading by internal components other than the internal circuit such as the CPU 505 with respect to internal data of the main control unit 41 such as data stored in the ROM 506, for example. Thereby, for example, a program for controlling a game, such as a user program stored in the ROM 506, can be prevented from being read from the outside of the main control unit 41 and provided for analysis or the like. Further, it is possible to reliably prevent aiming based on the analysis result of the game control processing program and input of an illegal signal due to connection of a so-called “hanging board”.

  In the random number circuit 509 built in or externally attached to the main control unit 41, when the frequency monitoring circuit 551 detects a frequency abnormality in the random number clock RCLK, the random number circuit 509 is stored in the bit number [4] of the internal information register CIF. The bit value of the information data CIF4 is set to “1”. Then, when the CPU 505 determines that the number of times that the read value of the internal information data CIF4 is continuously determined to be “1” has reached the clock abnormality determination value, the operation state of the random number circuit 509 is abnormal. Is determined to have occurred. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation state of the random number circuit 509, the operation of the main control unit 41 is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act by inputting an illegal signal as the random number clock RCLK.

  The CPU 505 built in the main control unit 41 writes the bit value “1” to the random value fetch specification register RDLT corresponding to the output of the latch signal to the random number circuit 509, and reads the random value register 559A a plurality of times. Then, all the bits of the read numerical data are monitored, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation state of the random number circuit 509 based on the presence / absence of bit data that does not change. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation state of the random number circuit 509, the operation of the main control unit 41 is stopped. As a result, it is possible to reliably and easily detect that an abnormality has occurred in the operating state of the random number circuit 509 and prevent fraud. In particular, by performing the internal lottery while the numerical data is not normally updated by the random number circuit 509, that is, while the numerical data is fixed, it is possible to prevent fraud such as always winning a special combination.

  The random number circuit 509 built in or externally attached to the main control unit 41 is a numerical data that becomes a random value every time the system is reset when the bit value [0] of the second random number initial setting KRS2 is “1”. Change the start value of. At this time, for example, a start value that is changed at each system reset may be determined using a count value of a free-run counter built in the main control unit 41, for example. As a result, the initial value can be determined by using different initial value determination data depending on the timing of system reset or the like, and illegal acts due to shooting or the like can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the extension time of the security mode is one of a plurality of extension times that can be selected in advance, corresponding to the bit value [2-0] of the security time setting KSES. Was not changed at each system reset, but the extension time added to the fixed time is determined as one of a plurality of extension times at each system reset, for example, by setting in the user program stored in the ROM 506 You may do it. In this case, the extension time is defined to be longer than the longest variable setting time. Then, after determining a rough extension time, a detailed extension time may be determined. As a result, the security time for entering the security mode at the time of system reset due to power-on or the like can be greatly changed for each system reset, and the operation start timing of the random number circuit 509 is updated or updated from the operation start timing of the slot machine 1. It becomes more difficult to specify the numerical data.

  Further, the extension time of the security mode may be determined using an ID number assigned to each chip constituting the main control unit 41. As an example, an extension time corresponding to the calculated value is executed by executing a part or all of an operation for performing a predetermined scramble process on the ID number and an operation such as addition / subtraction / multiplication / division using the ID number. May be set. In this case, the extension time may be randomly determined for each system reset, for example, by changing an arithmetic expression used for determining the extension time for each system reset. Furthermore, the count value of the free run counter, the ID number, and the like, for example, the arithmetic expression for determining the extension time using the ID number is determined corresponding to the count value of the free run counter stored at the time of system reset. The extended time may be determined randomly at each system reset by using a combination of the above. In addition, when changing the start value of the random number generated by the random number circuit 509 at each system reset, the start value of the random number can be changed by using a combination of the count value of the free-run counter and the ID number. You may decide.

  At the time of system reset, random number circuit setting processing for starting the security mode and setting the random number circuit 509 is performed, and in the random number circuit setting processing, setting of a random number update rule, setting of a random number start value, and the like are performed. When the user is reset, the security mode is omitted and the user mode is started. That is, at the time of system reset, the initial value of the random number is reset, but at the time of user reset, the random number circuit 509 is not set, and the numerical data that becomes the random number is continuously updated as it was before the reset. The Rukoto. This makes it difficult to specify numerical data that is a random number value in the random number circuit 509 from the user reset timing even when the user reset is intentionally performed, and it is possible to more effectively prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming. it can.

  In addition, the random number circuit including the setting of the random number start value is set in the security mode, the update of the numerical data is started, and then the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted after the transition to the user mode. It has become. In other words, the start value of the random number is set before the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted, and the update of numerical data starts from the set start value of the random number. Therefore, it is executed during the timer interrupt process. Although it can be specified to some extent from the determination status of the switches to the timing when the timer interrupt processing is permitted, the timing at which the update of the numerical data of the random number circuit 509 cannot be specified cannot be specified. It is difficult to specify the numerical data that is the random number value in, and it is possible to more effectively prevent fraudulent acts such as aiming.

  In this embodiment, a random number clock having an oscillation frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK generated by the control clock generation circuit 42 by the random number clock generation circuit 43 provided outside the main control unit 41. Although RCLK is generated and supplied to the random number circuit 509, the clock signal supplied to the CPU 505 of the main control unit 41 and the clock signal supplied to the random number circuit 509 are shared by the common clock generation circuit. You may make it produce | generate using the oscillation signal produced | generated by one included oscillator. In this case, for example, a frequency divider for generating the random number clock RCLK and the control clock CCLK is provided, and the latch clocks RC0, RC1, RC2 are synchronized with the control clock CCLK or the internal system clock SCLK. What is necessary is just to set the frequency division ratio etc. in each frequency divider so that it may become difficult to produce. The control clock generation circuit 42 and the random number clock generation circuit 43 may be provided in whole or in part inside the main control unit 41 or outside the main control unit 41.

  In the present embodiment, the random number circuit 509 is supplied with the random number clock RCLK generated by the random number clock generation circuit 43, and the random number update clock RGK and the latch clock RC0 are generated by the clock flip-flop 552. However, an oscillation signal that becomes the random number update clock RGK or the latch clock RC0 may be generated outside the random number circuit 509, such as the random number clock generation circuit 43, for example. Alternatively, a circuit for generating the random number update clock RGK and a circuit for generating the latch clock RC0 may be separately provided in the random number circuit 509. As an example, while generating a random number update clock RGK by a flip-flop similar to the clock flip-flop 552, an inversion circuit for inverting the signal state of the random number update clock RGK is provided, and a signal output from the inversion circuit is latched. It may be used as the clock RC0.

  In the random number circuit 509 applied to the present embodiment, when the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is “1”, that is, when the numerical value data is captured in the random value register R1D, a new random value capture request is generated. Even in this case, new numerical data is not taken into the random value register R1D. In such a state, the numerical data in the random value register R1D is read and the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is cleared. It becomes impossible to load new numerical data into the random value register R1D.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the game start signal SS1 is input by operating the start switch 7, the numerical data is latched and stored in the random value register R1D, and then the stored numerical data is read out. Until the numerical data of the random value storage work is updated, the random number latch flag data RDFM0 is in a state of “1”, so that the stored numerical data is held, and the game start signal SS1 is input during that time. However, since the new numerical data is not overwritten, the numerical data does not change even if noise is applied to the signal line of the game start signal SS1 due to static electricity or the like.

  Note that the configuration in which new numerical data is not captured in the random value register R1D while the numerical data is captured in the random value register R1D may be configured to prohibit latching of the new numerical data. However, although new numerical data is latched, writing to the random value register R1D may be prohibited.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in a state where the numerical data is taken into the random value register R1D, a configuration is adopted in which the stored numerical data is held until the stored numerical data is read out. However, in this case, even if the operation of the start switch 7 is performed during a period in which the game is not effective, the data is latched and numerical data is held in the random value register R1D. When the operation is enabled and the start switch 7 is operated, an internal lottery is performed based on numerical data latched at a timing different from the timing at which the start switch 7 was originally operated to start the game. New problems will arise.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the random number value register in the random value reading process executed once every four times (about 2.24 ms) of the timer interrupt process which is executed by interrupting the basic process every about 0.56 ms. It is confirmed whether or not the numerical data is latched in R1D, that is, whether or not the random number latch flag is set. If the numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, the numerical data in the random value register R1D is stored. It is designed to read. As a result, the random number latch flag is cleared, and new numerical data can be captured. That is, at predetermined time intervals (about 2.24 ms), it is confirmed whether or not numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, and if it is latched, the numerical data in the random value register R1D is read out, The state in which the numerical data is held in the register R1D is released, and the new numerical data can be taken into the random value register R1D.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 46, the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the start of the game is not permitted, and numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Since the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D can be stored within about 2.24 ms, which is the execution interval of the random value reading process, the start switch 7 before the start of the game is permitted. Even if the numerical data latched by the operation is held in the random value register R1D, the numerical data newly latched can be obtained at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated after the start of the game is permitted.

  Further, in the random value reading process, when numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, not only the numerical data is read, but also the value of the random value storage work in the RAM 507 is updated to the read numerical data. Each time new numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, the latched numerical data is read in the subsequent random value reading process, and the numerical data stored in the random value storage work is newly latched. It is designed to be updated to numerical data.

  At the start of the game, instead of the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is acquired and the internal lottery is performed. After the data is read, even if the numerical data changes due to noise on the signal line of the start switch, it will not affect the numerical data of the random number storage work used for internal lottery. Even in such a case, the internal lottery can be performed using the numerical data latched at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated.

  In this embodiment, the value of the random value register R1D is not retained when the power is interrupted, but the RAM 507 to which the random value storage work is assigned retains the stored data even when the power is interrupted. Therefore, even after the operation of the start switch 7 is detected and before the internal lottery starts, even if the value of the random value register R1D disappears due to a momentary power interruption or the like, the numerical data of the random value storage work is maintained. Numerical data latched at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated can be used for the internal lottery.

  In this embodiment, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is set in the lottery work assigned to the RAM 507, and the internal lottery thereafter. In this case, it is determined whether or not the winning combination has been won by performing an operation on the numerical data set in the lottery work, and the internal lottery ends when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. Even if the numerical data stored in the random number storage work is updated by the time, the numerical data acquired at the time when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is not changed until the internal lottery ends. However, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is transferred to the CPU 505. Set the work register, it may be to determine whether or not the player wins the role by performing an operation on numerical values set in the work register data in the subsequent internal lottery.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not the winning combination is obtained by performing an operation on the numerical data stored in the random value storage work. In this case, the operation of the start switch 7 is performed. The numerical data stored in the random number storage work is updated with the newly latched numerical data, for example, by prohibiting timer interrupt processing (main) during the period from the time of detection until the end of the internal lottery By preventing this from happening, it is possible to prevent the numerical data acquired when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected from being changed before the internal lottery is completed.

  In this embodiment, when the detection signals of the switches are input at a rate of once every four times of the timer interrupt processing (main) and the states of the detection signals coincide with each other twice, that is, about 2.24 ms. When the state of the period detection signal is the same, the detection state of the corresponding switch is determined. For this reason, it takes about 2.24 ms to detect the operation of the start switch 7 (change from off to on). However, if the random number reading process is shorter than this time, the start switch is turned from off to on. There is a possibility that the numerical data of the random number storage work is updated to the newly latched numerical data due to noise or the like between the time of the change and the detection. On the other hand, if the random number reading process is longer than this time, the numerical data latched at the timing of operating the start switch 7 may not be reflected in the numerical data of the random number storage work.

  On the other hand, the random number value reading process is also executed at a rate of once every four times of the timer interrupt process (main), and the minimum time required for updating the numerical data of the random number value storing work is about 2.24 ms. Yes, the numerical data of the random number storage work is not updated to the newly latched numerical data from when the start switch 7 changes from off to on, and the start switch 7 is operated. The numerical data latched at this timing can be reflected in the numerical data of the random value storage work.

  In this embodiment, the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the start of the game is not permitted, and numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Since the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D can be stored within the processing execution interval of about 2.24 ms), the operation of the start switch 7 before the start of the game is permitted. Even if the latched numerical data is held in the random number value register R1D, the newly latched numerical data can be acquired at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated after the start of the game is permitted. However, when the random number value register R1D receives the numerical data, the random number interrupt is generated and the random number value register is generated along with the generation of the random number interrupt. By reading the numerical data stored in R1D and making it possible to store the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D, it is latched by the operation of the start switch 7 before the start of the game is permitted. Even if the numerical data is held in the random value register R1D, the numerical data newly latched at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated after the start of the game is permitted may be obtained.

  In order to generate a random number interrupt, the bit value of the random number interrupt control data RDIC0 may be set to “1”. With this setting, a numerical value is stored in the random number value register 559A serving as the random number value register R1D. When the data is taken in, random number interruption occurs.

  Then, the main control unit 41 may execute the random value latch interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when the random number interrupt occurs. If another interrupt process is being executed when a random interrupt occurs, the random value latch interrupt process may be executed after the interrupt process being executed is completed.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the above-described random value latch interrupt process executed by the main control unit 41 when a random interrupt occurs. Note that other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the random value latch interrupt process.

  In the random value latch interrupt processing, first, after saving the register in use to the stack area (Sk1001), the numerical data is read from the random value register 559A (Sk1002), and the value stored in the random number value storage work is The numerical data read in Sk1002 is updated (Sk1003), the register saved in the stack area is restored in Sk1001 (Sk1004), and the process before the interrupt is returned.

  In this way, when the numerical data is taken into the random value register R1D, a random interrupt is generated, and the main control unit 41 interrupts the basic process and executes the random value latch interrupt process. By reading the numerical data of the register R1D, the random number latch flag is cleared, and it becomes possible to take in new numerical data. That is, every time numerical data is fetched into the random value register R1D, the random value latch interrupt processing is executed to read the numerical data in the random value register R1D, so that the numerical data is held in the random value register R1D. The state is released, and new numerical data can be taken into the random value register R1D.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 48, the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the start of the game is not permitted, and the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Even if this state is maintained, the numerical data is latched. Since the numerical data of the random number register R1D is read out by the occurrence of an interrupt due to the occurrence of the interruption, it becomes possible to store the newly latched numerical data, so the start switch 7 before the start of the game is permitted Even if the numerical data latched by the above operation is held in the random value register R1D, it is possible to acquire the newly latched numerical data at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated after the start of the game is permitted. .

  Further, in the random value latch interrupt processing, not only the numerical data latched in the random value register R1D but also the random value storage work value in the RAM 507 is updated to the read numerical data, so that the random value register R1D Each time new numerical data is latched, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work is updated to the latest latched numerical data.

  At the start of the game, instead of the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is acquired and the internal lottery is performed. After the data is read, even if the numerical data changes due to noise on the signal line of the start switch, it will not affect the numerical data of the random number storage work used for internal lottery. Even in such a case, the internal lottery can be performed using the numerical data latched at the timing when the start switch 7 is operated.

  In this modified example, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the numerical data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is set as the lottery work assigned to the RAM 507, and the internal lottery thereafter. In this case, it is determined whether or not the winning combination has been won by performing an operation on the numerical data set in the lottery work, and the internal lottery ends when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. Even if the numerical data stored in the random number storage work is updated by the time, the numerical data acquired at the time when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is not changed until the internal lottery ends. However, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the numerical value data stored in the random value storage work of the RAM 507 is transferred to the CPU 50. The set in the work register, may be to determine whether or not the player wins the role by performing an operation on numerical values set in the work register data in the subsequent internal lottery.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not the winning combination is obtained by performing an operation on the numerical data stored in the random value storage work. In this case, the operation of the start switch 7 is performed. The numerical data stored in the random value storage work is newly latched, for example, by prohibiting random value interrupt processing that accompanies the generation of random number interrupts during the period from the time of detection until the end of the internal lottery. By preventing the numerical data from being updated, it is possible to prevent the numerical data acquired when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected from being changed before the internal lottery is completed.

  In this modification, the numerical value data in the random value register R1D is read in the random value latch interrupt process. However, in the random value latch interrupt process, the numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D. A latch flag indicating that is set in the RAM 507, whether or not the latch flag is set in the RAM 507 in a basic process such as a BET process or a timer interrupt process (main) is determined, and it is determined that the latch flag is set in the RAM 507 In such a case, the numerical data in the random value register R1D may be read out. Even in such a configuration, the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the start of the game is not permitted, and the numerical value is stored in the random value register R1D. The data is stored and the state is not retained and the game Started newly becomes possible to obtain the numerical data latched at the timing of the start switch 7 has been operated after being allowed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the user reset signal is returned even if the control state of the main control unit 41 is restored to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on or the operation of the main control unit 41 is temporarily stopped at the momentary power failure. , It is possible to return to the control state before the operation is stopped, and the state may return to a state where a prescribed number of bets satisfying the game start condition are set.

  On the other hand, the power supply voltage is unstable during power interruption or instantaneous power failure. In such a situation, the input of the game start signal SS1 is detected by noise or the like, and numerical data is latched, and the random value register R1D. There is a risk that it will be stored and held as it is.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, after completion of the power interruption process (main), it is confirmed whether or not numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, that is, whether or not the random number latch flag is set. When numerical data is latched in the numerical register R1D, the process of reading the numerical data in the random number register R1D as a dummy is stopped by the operation of the main control unit 41 due to a voltage drop or by the input of a user reset signal. Until it starts, it repeats. As a result, the random number latch flag is cleared, and new numerical data can be captured.

  For this reason, after power interruption processing (main) is performed due to a momentary power interruption or the like, when restarting by input of a user reset signal, numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D due to noise or the like in the meantime. Even in such a case, since the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D can be stored by being read immediately, the numerical data latched by noise or the like at the momentary power failure, that is, in a state where the game can be started. An internal lottery is not performed using numerical data latched at a timing different from the timing at which the start switch 7 is operated.

  In this embodiment, after the power interruption process (main) is completed, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical data is latched in the random value register R1D, that is, whether or not the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Only when the random number latch flag is set, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D is read. However, after the power interruption process (main) is finished, the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Regardless of whether it is stored or not, the process of reading the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D may be performed repeatedly.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the main control unit 41 is activated, the random number latch flag is set before the game progress control is started, regardless of whether or not the control state before power interruption or user reset is restored. Whether the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. If the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D Since the numerical data newly latched can be stored in the random value register R1D, it is latched and held in the random value register R1D before the game progress control is started after starting. Numerical data, that is, numerical data latched at a timing different from the timing at which the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started. There is no possibility that internal lottery will be performed using the data.

  In this embodiment, after the main control unit 41 is activated, before the game progress control is started, whether or not the random number latch flag is set, that is, the latched numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. The numerical data stored in the random value register R1D is read out only when the random number latch flag is set, but the numerical value stored in the random value register R1D is uniformly read Data may be read out.

  If the random number latch flag is set regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 is activated and then returns to the control state before power interruption or user reset, the numerical data stored in the random number register R1D However, the numerical data stored in the random value register R1D may be read only when returning to the control state before power interruption or before user reset. The numerical data stored in the random value register R1D may be read out only when the control state before the user reset is restored and when the return control state is a state where the game can be started.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 507 is prohibited in the power interruption process (main), the operation stop state or the user reset is waited. However, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and the voltage drop The configuration may be such that the voltage recovery is determined when no signal is input and the program is started from the user mode of the startup process (main). In such a configuration, when the voltage recovery is determined Whether or not the random number latch flag is set, and when the random number latch flag is set, after reading the numerical data stored in the random number value register R1D, from the user mode of the startup process (main) It is preferable to have a configuration that starts the program, and in this way, the progress control of the game is started at the moment of power interruption. It is possible to reliably read the numerical data held in the random value register R1D in the previous stage and to store the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Using numerical data latched in the random value register R1D before the start, that is, numerical data latched at a timing different from the timing when the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started. There will be no internal lottery.

  Further, in this embodiment, even after the activation of the main control unit 41 and before the progress control of the game starts, the operation is stopped or the user reset is waited for after the completion of the electric processing. The numerical value data held in the numerical value register R1D can be read and the numerical value data newly latched in the random number value register R1D can be stored, but only one of the random number value registers R1D can be stored. It is possible to read the numerical data held in the memory and store the numerical data newly latched in the random value register R1D. Even in such a configuration, the game can be started. The internal lottery is prevented from being performed using numerical data latched at a timing different from the timing at which the start switch 7 is operated. It can be.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is set rising edge indicating the rise of the start switch 7 whether or not the start switch 7 has been operated in a state capable of starting the game determines based on whether Tei Luke not.

  The rising edge of the start switch 7 is detected by the start switch 7 in the switch input determination process that is executed once every four times (about 2.24 ms). It is set on condition that the definite data based on the state has changed from off to on. Since the deterministic data is data that is updated only when the previous detection state and the current state match each time the switch input determination processing is performed, the rising edge of the start switch 7 is detected when the detection state of the start switch 7 is off. When the switch is in the state, it is set by detecting that the start switch 7 is turned on twice in succession in the switch input determination process.

  On the other hand, since the execution interval of the switch input determination process is about 2.24 ms, the start switch 7 is provided on the condition that at least about 2.24 ms or more is continuously detected after the start switch 7 is turned on. Rising edge is set, and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, on condition that the start switch 7 is continuously detected for a certain period (at least about 2.24 ms) in a state where the game can be started, The operation of the start switch 7 is detected and the game is started, and the game is prevented from starting even if the start switch 7 is erroneously detected due to noise such as static electricity. it can.

  In this embodiment, the operation of the start switch 7 is detected on the condition that the start switch 7 is continuously turned on for a certain period (at least about 2.24 ms) in a state where the game can be started. The game is started. For example, the detection state of the start switch 7 is confirmed a plurality of times in one switch input determination process, and on the condition that all are determined to be on, The operation may be detected and the game may be started. Even in such a configuration, the game starts when the start switch 7 is erroneously detected due to noise such as static electricity. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, when the rising edge of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the game can be started, whether or not the random number latch flag is set, that is, the start switch 7 The numerical data is latched by the above operation, and it is checked whether or not the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D, and the game is started only when the numerical data is stored in the random value register R1D. Yes.

  Therefore, the numerical value data is not stored in the random value register R1D, that is, the random number value used for the internal lottery is not latched, but the game is started and the internal lottery is not performed. The internal lottery can be reliably performed using the numerical data latched at the timing when the switch 7 is operated.

  In the embodiment, the lottery related to the game is performed at the timing when the predetermined signal is input, but the process for performing the lottery related to the game is performed at the timing when the predetermined signal is input. The lottery related to the game is not necessarily required at the timing when the predetermined signal is input. For example, the random number circuit latches the numerical data at the timing when the predetermined signal is input, acquires the numerical data latched by the random number circuit at the timing when the predetermined signal is input, and stores the random value. If the data is stored temporarily in the work, and then the numerical data stored in the random value work is read out and the lottery related to the game is performed, the numerical data latched from the random value circuit is obtained, and the random value work The process stored in the game corresponds to the process for performing the lottery related to the game, and it is not necessary to perform the lottery related to the game using the numerical data at the timing when the predetermined signal is input.

  Next, commands that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sends a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a freeze command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end to the sub control unit 91. A plurality of types of commands including commands, gaming state commands, standby commands, stop commands, error commands, return commands, setting commands, setting confirmation commands, door commands, and operation detection commands are transmitted.

  These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the command type and 1-byte extension data indicating the command content, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the command type from the type data.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game. Sent when a medal is inserted or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the number of bets in a state where is not set. Further, since the BET command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, it is possible to specify that the betting number setting operation has been performed by receiving the BET command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, and in a state where a predetermined number of bets is set, Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Further, since the internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to specify that the start switch 7 has been operated by receiving the internal winning command.

  The freeze command is a command indicating whether or not to control the freeze state when it is determined to control to the freeze state, which will be described later, and the timing in the case of controlling to the freeze state. Sometimes sent.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted each time stop control is performed in accordance with the stop operation of each reel. Since the reel stop command is transmitted when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, it is possible to specify that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated by receiving the reel stop command. .

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the combination of symbols arranged on the winning line LN, whether or not there is a winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the winning, and all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed. Sent after.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game, the type of RT, and the number of remaining RT games, and is transmitted when the game ends.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to an error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is sent and reset. When the error state is canceled after the operation is performed, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power interruption.

  The setting command is a command indicating the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. At the time of transition to the setting change state, a setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is transmitted, and when the setting change state ends. A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is transmitted. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it can be specified that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of setting. .

  The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation command that indicates the start of setting confirmation is transmitted when entering the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation end is indicated when the setting confirmation state ends. A confirmation command is sent.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state), when the power is turned on, at the end of one game (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting of ”can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (from on to off, from off to on).

  The operation detection command is a switch in which the detection state (on / off) has changed among the operation switches (MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R), whether the detection state has changed from off to on, This command indicates whether the state has changed from on to off and the detection state (on / off) of another switch, and is transmitted when the detection state of any of these operation switches has changed.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in the basic process, and the command data in the command buffer assigned to the non-initialized area is updated to the newly generated command data, and the serial communication circuit The data is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by being transferred to the transmission data register 561 of 511.

  On the other hand, the door command is generated in the door monitoring process of the timer interrupt process (main) and stored in the door command storage area. The door command storage area stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, A door command indicating the detection state is stored. Further, the door command stored in the door command storage area is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by a newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game is finished, a door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of a door command stored in the door command storage area is set, and whether the door command transmission request 1 is set or whether the door is open is detected. When the detection state of the switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When the door command transmission request 2 is set, the door command stored in the door command storage area is set. In the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main) executed after transmission is instructed, it is stored in the command buffer and transferred to the transmission data register 561 of the serial communication circuit 511 to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The

The operation detection command is used when a change in the detection state of any switch is detected in the switch input determination process of the timer interrupt process (main) (when edge data of any switch is set). is generated, together with Ru stored in the operation detection command storage area, the transmission of the operation detection command operation detection command transmission request is stored in the operation detection command storage area by being set is an instruction, the timer split to be subsequently executed In the command transmission processing of the main processing (main), the data is stored in the command buffer and transferred to the transmission data register 561 of the serial communication circuit 511 to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  As described above, both the door command and the operation detection command are stored in the command buffer in the command setting process of the timer interrupt process (main), and transferred to the transmission data register 561 of the serial communication circuit 511 so that the sub-control unit 91 If the door command transmission request 2 is set, that is, if the door command transmission is requested, even if the operation detection command is requested to be transmitted, the door command is transmitted. Since the operation detection command is transmitted only when the door command transmission request 2 is not set, both the door command transmission request 2 and the operation detection command transmission request are set. If the command is sent, the command transmission process sends a door command and sends the next command. Operation detection command in the processing is to be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a command (hereinafter referred to as a first command) triggered by an event associated with the progress control of the game is generated in the basic process and transferred to the transmission data register 561 to transfer the serial communication circuit 511. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but a command (hereinafter referred to as a second command) triggered by an event that may occur regardless of the progress of the game, such as a door command or an operation detection command, is basically It is generated by a timer interrupt process (main) executed by interrupting the process periodically. In addition, since the command is composed of 2-byte data, if the configuration is such that the second command is immediately transferred to the transmission data register 561 when the second command is generated, it may be accompanied by game progress control in the basic process. After transferring the first byte of command data, the timer interrupt process is interrupted and executed before transferring the second byte, and the second command is inserted between the first byte and the second byte of the first command data. May be received and cannot be received as a regular command on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the command storage process 2 in which the first command generated in the basic process (game process) after the interruption is permitted is transferred to the transmission data register 561, as shown in FIG. From the stage before starting the transfer of the first command to the stage until the transfer of the command of the second byte is completed, timer interrupt processing including the command transmission processing (main ) Is prohibited, and the second command does not enter between command data of a plurality of bytes constituting the first command.

  In this embodiment, the door command and the operation detection command are applied as commands triggered by an event that can occur regardless of the progress of the game. Any command that is required to be transmitted in the interrupt process (main) may be used, and a command indicating that an error that may occur unexpectedly, such as vibration of a gaming machine, may be applied as the second command.

  The main control unit 41 monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. Specifically, in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is converted to a positive logic. Open detection switch 25on = 1, 0 is acquired when the door is closed, and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the door monitoring process performed every 2.24 ms, in the port input process described above The acquired state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 (the input state that has been the same for two consecutive times) continues to be logically ORed for about 100 ms (45 times of door monitoring processing), and the door opening detection switch is used using the result. 25 detection states are determined. When the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, when the door opening detection switch 25 is turned on (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is on. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned on (opened) during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is off. If the result of this determination and the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command storage area match, it is determined that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command storage area is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 is set. To instruct the transmission of the door command. Further, when the main control unit 41 determines that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main control unit 41 updates the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main control unit 41 sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command storage area. Further, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main control unit 41 updates the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  As described above, the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 is updated by linking to the door command transmission command.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, and stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as operation switches for the main control unit 41 to control the progress of the game. Of these operation switches, the start switch 7 is also used for setting value setting in a setting change state.

  The operation of these switches is not always related to the progress control of the game in all control states constituting from the end of the game to the end of the next game, but is related to the progress control of the game according to the control state. Sometimes it may not be involved.

  In the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 and the start switch 7 is involved in the game progress control, and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is the game progress control. Not involved in. Furthermore, even in the control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, the bet number has not reached the specified number, that is, the bet number can be further added, and the game start condition is In a state where it is not established, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is involved in the game progress control, but the operation of the start switch 7 is not involved in the game progress control, while the betting number has reached the specified number. In a state where the number of bets cannot be added and the game start condition is satisfied, the operation of the start switch 7 is involved in the game progress control, but the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is the game progress control. Not involved in.

  In the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is involved in the game progress control, and the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 and the start switch 7 is not involved in the game progress control. Furthermore, even in the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, if all the reels are rotating, all the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are involved in the progress control of the game. In the stop state, only the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel among the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is involved in the progress control of the game, and the stop switch corresponding to the stopped reel is the game switch. Not involved in progress control.

The control state in the present invention is not limited to the control state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game, or the control state from the start of the game to the end of the game, but from the end of the game (after changing the setting). In the control state up to the start, the bet number has not reached the specified number, that is, the bet number can be further added and the game start condition is not satisfied, the bet number has reached the specified number A control state in which the number of bets cannot be added and a game start condition is satisfied, a control state in which all reels are rotating among control states from the start of the game to the end of the game, left Control state in which only the reel is stopped, Control state in which only the middle reel is stopped, Control state in which only the right reel is stopped, Control state in which the left and middle reels are stopped, Left and right reels Sealed and has control state, right, control state middle reel is stopped, the wait period state, applicable also for each of the states of the payout period medal. Further, even in a control state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, or even in a state where the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not involved in the progress control of the game, the specified number of bets has already been set. The control state in which the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not related to the progress control of the game, and the specified number of bets has not been set yet, but since the credit does not remain, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 controls the progress of the game. It can be said that the control state is not different from the control state not involved in the control.

  In the setting change state, the operation of the start switch 7 is involved in the change control of the setting value, and the operations of the MAXBET switch 6 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not involved in the game progress control. Even in the setting change state, the operation of the start switch 7 is involved in the change control of the set value before the set value is determined. However, after the set value is determined, all the operation switches Not involved in change control. In the setting confirmation state, any operation of the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is not involved in the game progress control.

  The main control unit 41 detects these operation switches in a switch input determination process executed during a timer interrupt process (main) executed by interrupting at regular time intervals. In the switch input determination process, the detection state of the operation switch is monitored, and when any operation switch changes from off to on, edge data (rising edge) indicating that the corresponding operation switch changes from off to on Is set, edge data (falling edge) indicating that the corresponding operation switch has changed from on to off is set.

  Then, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the operation switch has been operated based on whether or not the rising edge of the operation switch related to the progress control of the game is set according to the control state at the current stage in the game process. If it is determined that the operation switch is operated, all the edge data is cleared, and the game progress control is executed according to the operation switch operation, and the game progress control is performed. The accompanying commands (BET command, internal winning command, reel stop command, etc.) are transferred to the transmission data register 561 of the serial communication circuit 511 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Even if the operation of any one of the operation switches is detected and the edge data is set, if it is not cleared by the next switch input determination process, it is cleared by the next switch input determination process.

  When determining that the rising edge of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is set in the reel rotation processing, the main control unit 41 determines whether the detection state of the other operation switches is on. When it is determined that the detection state of the other operation switch is on, that is, when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is detected while the other operation switch is being operated, this is effective. The stop operation of the corresponding reel is not performed without the stop operation.

  This is because, when two or more operations are detected among the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, if priority is given to the stop control based on one of the operations, the other stop control is delayed, and the stop mode of the reel This is because there is a possibility that a problem such as unnaturalness may occur, and even if the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is detected while the other operation switches are operated as described above, By not performing the stop control of the reel to be performed, the stop control of the other reel is not delayed by the stop control of the one reel.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 determines that the rising edge of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is set in the reel rotation processing, the detection state of the other operation switch is not limited to the other stop switch. If the detection state of any of the other operation switches is determined to be on, the effective stop operation is not performed and the corresponding reel stop control is not performed. Without extracting only the detection state of the stop switch from the detection state of the operation switch, for example, when on is set to 1 and off is set to 0, the sum of the detection states of all the operation switches is calculated. If the number is two or more, the detection states of all the operation switches can be collectively determined, for example, the other operation switches are determined to be in the detection state.

  When the main control unit 41 determines that the rising edge of the start switch 7 for determining the setting value is set at a stage where the setting value has not yet been determined in the setting change state, When it is determined whether or not the detection state of the operation switch is on, and it is determined that the detection state of any of the other operation switches is on, control to confirm the set value is not performed. Yes.

  This is because, as will be described later, the operation switch used by the main control unit 41 for controlling the progress of the game is diverted as an operation unit in the administrator mode that is controlled on the sub-control unit 91 side in the setting change state. Even when the start switch 7 for confirming the setting value is operated in a state where the other operation switches are being operated at the stage where the setting value has not yet been confirmed as described above, the setting value confirmation control is performed. By not doing so, even if the start switch 7 is mistakenly operated simultaneously with the operation of the administrator mode, the set value is not fixed and the setting value is not set. However, it is possible to reduce the annoyance of having to change the setting from the beginning by turning off the power again due to an erroneous operation. To have.

  When the main control unit 41 determines a change in the detection state of any of the operation switches in the above-described switch input determination process, the main control unit 41 sets the edge data, and is a switch in which the edge data is set, a rising edge, An operation detection command indicating whether it is a falling edge or a detection state of another switch is generated, stored in the operation detection command storage area, and an operation detection command transmission request is set.

  When the operation detection command transmission request is set, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command storage area is read out in the command transmission process in the timer interrupt process (main), and the serial communication circuit 511 The data is transferred to the transmission data register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 transmits an operation detection command that can specify that the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated to the sub-control unit 91. Thus, it is specified that the operation switch detected by the main control unit 41 is operated regardless of whether or not the sub control unit 91 is an operation switch related to the progress control of the game in each control state. An effect can be executed in accordance with the operation of an operation switch that is not involved in the progress control of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 transmits an operation detection command indicating that only when the detection state (on / off) of any one of the operation switches changes, and the operation detection The transmission of commands can be reduced as much as possible, the control load related to the transmission of operation detection commands can be reduced, and the sub-control unit 91 does not need to receive operation detection commands more than necessary.

  Further, not only when the detection state of any of the operation switches changes from off to on, but also when the detection state changes from on to off, an operation detection command indicating the change is transmitted, so the sub-control unit 91 side Therefore, since it is possible to identify in real time the detection state of the operation switch that is not involved in the game progress control, the operation is released not only at the timing when the operation switch operation not involved in the game progress control is started. It is also possible to perform different presentations according to the timing that has been continued for a certain period of time without releasing the timing and operation, or to change the start timing and end timing of the presentation, according to the operation of the operation switch not involved in the progress control of the game Various productions can be performed.

  In this embodiment, when the change of the detection state of any operation switch is detected from the detection of the change of the operation switch from the detection state off to the on state or from the on to the off state, An operation detection command that identifies the detection state of the operation switch is sent, but only the fact that the detection state of any of the operation switches has changed from off to on is detected, and the fact that it has changed from off to on is indicated. When detected, an operation detection command capable of specifying the operation of the corresponding operation switch is transmitted, or only that the detection state of any operation switch has changed from on to off is detected, and from on to off When it is detected that the operation has changed, an operation detection command that can specify the operation of the corresponding operation switch may be transmitted. It is, it is possible to further reduce the transmission of the operation detection command, on top which can reduce the load of the control according to the transmission of the operation detection command, can also reduce the operation detection command received by the sub-control section 91 side.

  In this embodiment, when the detection state (on / off) of any operation switch changes, an operation detection command that can specify the detection state of another operation switch in addition to the detection state of the operation switch is provided. The sub-control unit 91 is configured to transmit to the sub-control unit 91. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the transmission of the operation detection command as much as possible. Not only the detection state of the operation switch whose detection state has changed, but also the detection state of other operation means can be specified. On the sub-control unit 91 side, a plurality of operations such as simultaneous operation of a plurality of switches or operation of only a specific switch It is possible to produce an effect that reflects the operation status of the operation switch, and it is possible to produce a variety of effects using the operation of the operation switch. Furthermore, even when the sub-control unit 91 misses the operation detection command, the latest detection state can be specified for all the operation switches based on the operation detection command transmitted next time, and the game progress control is performed. An effect according to the operation of the operation switch not involved in the operation can be reliably executed.

  In the present embodiment, only when the detection state (on / off) of any of the operation switches changes, an operation detection command indicating that fact is transmitted. However, the main control unit 41 includes the MAXBET switch 6. Regardless of whether or not any of the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, the ON / OFF state of each of the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R can be specified. The operation control command may be transmitted at regular intervals, and even in such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 can identify that the operation switch detected by the main control unit 41 has been operated. It is possible to produce effects according to the operation of the operation switches that are not involved in the progress control of the game.

  In the present embodiment, an operation command transmission request is set in the timer interrupt processing (main) switch input determination processing, and is transferred to the transmission data register 561 in the subsequent command transmission processing and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the basic process, it is determined whether or not an operation switch that does not participate in the game progress control is operated, that is, whether or not edge data of the operation switch that does not participate in the game progress control is set. When an operation switch not involved in the progress control is operated, an operation detection command indicating that may be transferred to the transmission data register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In addition, it is specified that the operation switch detected by the main control unit 41 is operated on the sub control unit 91 side. It has become so that, it is possible to perform the production in response to the operation of the operation switch that is not involved in the progression control of the game.

In this embodiment, a command associated with the progress control of the game is generated in the basic process, transferred to the transmission data register 561, and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but is not involved in the progress control of the game. The operation detection command accompanying the operation of the operation switch is generated in the switch input determination process of the timer interrupt process (main), transferred to the transmission data register 561 in the subsequent command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main), Although it is a structure transmitted to the control part 91, it is determined whether operation of the operation switch in connection with game progress control was detected in the basic process, and operation of the operation switch in connection with game progress control was detected. Control the game in the event that the It is temporarily stored in the buffer, and it is also determined whether or not an operation not involved in the game progress control is detected in the basic process, and the operation of the operation switch is detected when the operation switch operation not involved in the game progress control is detected. An operation detection command indicating that an operation not involved in the control has been detected is generated, temporarily stored in the command buffer in the same manner as the command accompanying the game progress control , and then waiting for transmission in the timer interrupt process (main) When the command is stored in the command buffer, the command may be transferred to the transmission data register 561 and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. With such a configuration, the control state of the basic process is related. Therefore, it is possible to share command transmission control.

  In addition, when such a configuration is adopted, there is a possibility that a plurality of transmission waiting commands may be stored before the command stored in the command buffer is transmitted in the next timer interrupt process (main). If a plurality of commands are transmitted continuously, the sub-control unit 91 may be missed, and the processing time of the timer interrupt process (main) becomes long, and the basic process is stagnant. Therefore, when there are a plurality of commands stored in the command buffer, it is preferable to transmit only one command per timer interrupt process (main). However, if only one command is transmitted per timer interrupt process (main), the command transmission timing will be delayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of adopting the above configuration, when the operation switch operation involved in the game progress control and the operation switch operation not involved in the game progress control are detected at the same time, There is a possibility that an operation detection command accompanying the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control is generated at the same time and stored in the command buffer. In this case, in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main), it is preferable to prioritize the transmission of the command associated with the game progress control over the operation detection command. The transmission is not delayed, and it is possible to prevent the presentation according to the operation related to the game progress control from being delayed due to the influence of the operation not related to the game progress control.

  The main control unit 41 executes a start-up process when power is turned on, and an interrupt is permitted at the end of the start-up process. Thereafter, a timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular intervals. When the main control unit 41 can return to the state before the power interruption, a return command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 before interruption is permitted in the startup process. Also, if the main control unit 41 cannot return to the state before the power interruption due to an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 507, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality is issued before the interrupt is permitted in the startup process. Sent to. If the setting key switch 37 is in the on state and the RAM 507 is initialized and does not return to the state before the power interruption, the setting command indicating the setting start is issued before the interruption is permitted in the starting process. It is transmitted to the control unit 91. Of the commands transmitted in the startup process, the return command specifies that the main control unit 41 returns to the state before the power interruption. The error command indicating a RAM abnormality and the setting command indicating the start of setting It is specified that the control unit 41 does not return to the state before the power interruption.

  As described above, the operation detection command is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main), and the interrupt process is not permitted until the end of the start process. Therefore, after the main control unit 41 is started, the main control unit 41 is started. An error command indicating a RAM abnormality that indicates that the main control unit 41 does not return to the state before the power failure or a setting start is specified. After the setting command is transmitted, the transmission of the operation detection command is permitted.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the main control unit 41 determines that the state before power interruption is not restored and transmits an error command indicating a RAM abnormality to the sub-control unit 91 or returns to the state before power interruption. Since the operation detection command is not transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 until the return command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, whether or not to return the main control unit 41 is not yet determined. Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute an effect according to the operation specified from the operation detection command, and prevents an effect that is inconsistent with the state of the main control unit 41 from being executed when the power is turned on. it can.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 transmits a return command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, and a setting command indicating start of setting to the sub-control unit 91 in the startup process, and then permits a timer interrupt by permitting the interrupt. Processing (main) is executed, and the operation detection command is transmitted in the command transmission process. In the command transmission process, the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, and the setting command indicating the setting start are already present. It is possible to transmit the return command, the error command indicating the RAM abnormality, and the setting command indicating the start of setting prior to the operation detection command without determining whether or not it is transmitted.

  Further, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a voltage drop signal is input at the beginning of the timer interrupt process (main), and executes the power interruption process (main) only when the voltage drop signal is input. Therefore, the operation detection command transmission request is set in the switch input determination processing of the previous timer interrupt processing (main), and the power interruption processing (main) is performed without transmitting the operation detection command based on the operation detection command transmission request. Although the operation may stop, the main control unit 41 clears the operation detection command transmission request at the time of activation, so that the operation detection command that has not been transmitted in the state before the power interruption is detected. After returning, an operation detection command that does not reflect the detection state of the operation switch after the return is not transmitted. For this reason, after the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent an effect corresponding to an operation not related to the progress control of the game from being executed even though the operation switch is not operated at all.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The reception buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub-control unit 91 is the earliest. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the stage, and the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc. are controlled based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Performs output control of various rendering devices.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. Control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 stores the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among these, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and changes to the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the betting number setting operation is performed during the execution of the effect, that is, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a BET command indicating that the bet number has been set, Is to be canceled. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub-control unit 91 receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, it receives an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received before, the effect being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the sub control unit 91 stores the effect pattern in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received. As a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  In the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91, a detection state storage area in which the change state of the detection state of the operation switch is stored for each operation switch, and an operation detection flag indicating that the operation state of the operation switch has changed are provided for each operation switch. An operation detection flag storage area to be stored is allocated. Furthermore, the detection state storage area is assigned with a detection state before receiving the operation detection command (previous) and a detection state after receiving the operation detection command (this time). The detection state of each operation switch before and after reception is stored.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs the operation detection process 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (sub) that an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. In the operation detection process 1, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command is an operation detection command. If it is determined that the command is an operation detection command, the current detection state stored in the detection state storage area is changed to the previous detection state. , And the detection state of each operation switch indicated by the operation detection command is stored as the current detection state, and when there is an operation switch in which the previous detection state and the current detection state are different, it is changed from off to on. In this case, a rising flag is set as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch, and when it changes from on to off, a falling flag is set as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the detection state of any of the operation switches changes, the main control unit 41 transmits an operation detection command that can specify the detection states of all the operation switches, and the sub-control unit. 91, when an operation detection command is received, the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command stored in the detection state storage area is updated. An operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch is set, and the sub-control unit 91 confirms the presence or absence of the operation detection flag, so that the detection state of the operation switch has changed and the operation detection command How the detection state of each operation switch has changed before and after reception, that is, whether it has changed from off to on, or from on to off, So that the it can be determined.

  For this reason, the sub-control unit 91 can perform an effect or change the effect according to not only the timing when the operation of the operation switch is started but also the timing when the operation is released. Various effects can be performed according to the operation mode of the operation switches not involved.

  In the present embodiment, how the sub-control unit 91 changes the detection state of each operation switch from the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command stored in the detection state storage area. In this embodiment, when the detection state of any of the operation switches changes, the main control unit 41 switches the detection state from changing to off to on. Or an operation detection command that can specify whether the change is from on to off, so that the detection state of each operation switch before and after receiving the operation detection command is determined from the operation detection command itself. It is good also as a structure which discriminate | determines whether it changed or not. By setting it as such a structure, the control load of the sub control part 91 accompanying operation of the operation switch which does not affect progress control of a game It can be reduced.

  The detection state storage area stores the detection state of each operation switch, and the sub-control unit 91 sets one of the operation detection flags and indicates the detection state of the operation switch corresponding to the operation detection flag. When a change is identified, it is possible to identify not only the operation switch whose detection state has changed but also the detection state of another operation switch by checking the detection state of the other operation switch in the detection state storage area. ing.

  For this reason, it becomes possible to specify the state in which a plurality of operation switches are operated at the same time, and for example, it is possible to produce an effect by operating a plurality of operation switches simultaneously, such as the operation effect of pattern 1 or pattern 3 Thus, various effects can be performed depending on how the plurality of operation switches are operated.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 detects the left stop switch when performing the effect by operating the operation switches of the left stop switch and the middle stop switch at the same time as in the operation effect of the pattern 1, and If the middle stop switch operation is detected when the right stop switch is not detected, the stage change effect is performed, but both the left stop switch and the right stop switch are detected. When the operation is detected, the operation of the left stop switch and the middle stop switch is detected at the same time as described above. In this case, the stage change effect is not performed.

  That is, when performing a specific operation effect in response to an operation of a specific operation switch, if an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch, the specific operation effect is not performed. ing.

  For this reason, a specific operation effect based on an operation of a specific operation switch is performed when the specific operation switch is operated simultaneously with another operation switch or when the other operation switch is operated. Since it is not executed and a specific operation effect is not executed by an erroneous operation, the specific operation effect can be executed only for a player who desires the specific operation effect.

  In addition, when an operation switch other than a specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch as described above, by not performing a specific operation effect, for example, the operation effects of pattern 1 and pattern 3 Even when some of the operation switches for executing each effect overlap, different effects can be executed. That is, the operation effect of pattern 1 is executed by operating the left stop switch and the middle stop switch simultaneously, and the operation effect of pattern 2 is executed by operating the middle stop switch and the right stop switch simultaneously. When the middle stop switch is operated while the left stop switch and right stop switch are operated at the same time, the left stop switch and middle stop switch are operated simultaneously, or the middle stop switch and right stop switch are operated simultaneously. However, it is not possible to determine whether or not it is possible to assign an effect only to one of the simultaneous operations, but an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch. If a specific operation effect is not performed, And even cases like operation effect of the pattern 2, can be assigned an effect for each of the simultaneous operation as it can be performed more diverse effect by way of the operation of a plurality of operation switches.

  When the detection state of any operation switch changes from off to on in the operation detection process 1, that is, when the operation of the operation switch starts, the sub control unit 91 corresponds to the operation time counter assigned to the RAM 91c. The operation time counter value of the operation switch to be initialized is initialized. The value of the operation time counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process (sub) is executed, and the elapsed time since the operation switch operation started by referring to the value of the operation time counter Time can be determined.

  The sub-control unit 91 executes the operation detection process 2 every time the timer interrupt process (sub) is executed. In the operation detection process 2, it is determined for each operation switch whether or not the current detection state stored in the detection state storage area is on. If it is on, that is, if the operation of the operation switch continues. Refers to the value of the operation time counter of the corresponding operation switch, and if a predetermined time has elapsed, sets a time elapse flag indicating that to the operation switch. In this embodiment, a 3 second elapsed flag, a 5 second elapsed flag, and a 10 second elapsed flag are set as a time elapsed flag when 3 seconds have elapsed, 5 seconds have elapsed, and 10 seconds have elapsed.

  For this reason, the sub-control unit 91 can perform an effect when a certain time has elapsed since the operation switch has been operated continuously by confirming whether or not the time lapse flag is set. Become.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 counts the time that has elapsed since the detection state of the operation switch has not changed from on to off after the detection state of the operation switch has changed from off to on. The sub-control unit 91 side can grasp the continuous operation time of the operation switch, and the main control unit 41 side does not have a timer for measuring the continuous operation time for each individual switch. It is possible to detect the continuous operation time of the operation switch only by changing the value, but after the operation switch operation changed from off to on on the main control unit 41 side, the operation switch did not change from on to off. By measuring the time and transmitting a command indicating that the operation switch has been operated continuously for the specified time when this time reaches the specified time, the sub-control unit 91 side , It may be able to identify that the operation of the operation switch is operated continuously.

  In addition, when the detection state of any one of the operation switches is changed from off to on in the operation detection process 1, that is, when the operation of the operation switch is started, the sub-control unit 91 sets the continuous operation counter assigned to the RAM 91c. 1 is added to the value of the continuous operation counter of the corresponding operation switch. The value of the continuous operation counter is cleared by a command from the sub-control unit 91 such as when the detection state of another operation switch changes from off to on or at the start of production. It is possible to determine the number of times that a specific operation switch has been operated continuously from the starting point. Then, the sub-control unit 91 can confirm the value of the continuous operation counter, and can produce an effect when the number of continuous operation of the operation switch from a certain starting point has reached the specified number.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 counts the number of times that the detection state of the operation switch has changed from off to on, so that the sub-control unit 91 can grasp the number of consecutive operation switch operations. The main controller 41 does not have a counter for counting the number of continuous operations for each individual switch, and it is possible to detect the number of operation switches by simply changing the program of the sub controller 91. By counting the number of times the operation switch operation has changed from off to on on the main control unit 41 side, and sending the command indicating that the operation switch has been operated the specified number of times when this number reaches the specified number of times, On the side of the sub-control unit 91, it may be possible to specify that the operation switch has been operated a specified number of times.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are aligned on any winning line. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bet number. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing.

  The big bonus may be indicated as BB and the regular bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to set a winning flag in the RAM 507 to win the internal lottery and allow the winning of the winning combination.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are aligned on any winning line. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bet number. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing.

  The big bonus may be indicated as BB and the regular bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order for each winning combination determined in accordance with the gaming state to occur, the winning flag indicating that the winning of the winning combination is permitted in the internal lottery described above needs to be set in the RAM 507.

  FIGS. 51 to 54 are diagrams for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations. FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the gaming state and RT transition controlled by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an outline of the gaming state and RT.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the slot machine in this embodiment is controlled to any one of the normal gaming state, the inside 1, 2, RB, and BB (RB). Is controlled to any one of RT0 to RT4.

  Referring to FIG. 51, special bonus combinations include big bonuses 1 to 4 (hereinafter, each big bonus is referred to as BB), regular bonuses 1 and 2 (hereinafter, each regular bonus is referred to as RB). 6 types of bonuses are included.

  BB1 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB2 is awarded when a combination of “network 7−network 7−network 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. BB3 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. BB4 is awarded when the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB4 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-white 7-net 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  When winning one of BB1 to BB4, the game shifts to a big bonus that is controlled by the game every time during the BB regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as BBRB).

  The big bonus generated due to the winning of any one of BB1 to BB4 is terminated on condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out.

  RB1 wins when a combination of “net 7-net 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the pay lines. RB2 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  When winning one of RB1 and RB2, a transition is made to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB).

  The regular bonus generated due to the winning of either RB1 or RB2 ends on the condition that any winning combination has won 6 times or 12 games have been consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 55, from the internal winning one of BB1, BB3, RB2 until winning a prize, it is controlled to 1 / RT0 inside, and after winning an internal winning one of BB2, BB4, RB1 Until this is done, the internal control is controlled to 2 · RT0. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, after the big bonus or regular bonus (collectively referred to as a bonus) is completed, the control is performed to normal RT4.

  Even if one of BB1 to BB4, RB1, or RB2 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to enable winning of these roles, these I won't win a role. The symbols composing BB1 to BB4, RB1, and RB2 ("black 7", "white 7", and "net 7") are arranged within 5 frames on each of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R. This is because it has not been done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning roles, there are middle bells, lower right bells, upper bells 1-8, middle watermelons, right lower watermelons, upper watermelons, lower cherries, middle cherries, one role, right-up bells, right-up bevels, Includes a rising rivet.

  The middle bell is awarded when the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN, and eight medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bells are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a middle bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  A downward-sloping bell is when any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Replay”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is aligned on the winning line LN. Wins and 8 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one below the bell, and the replay and plum of the right reel 2R are arranged at a position one above the bell. Therefore, when any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Replay”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is prepared, “Bell-Bell-Bell” ”Are lowered to the right, that is, aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  Further, either the plum or the replay is arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and the bell is arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-down bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, upper bells 1 to 8 will be described. The upper bell 1 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Orange-Orange” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 2 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Orange-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 3 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-BAR-Orange” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 4 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 5 is awarded when a combination of “plum-orange-orange” is arranged on the winning line LN. The upper bell 6 is awarded when the combination of “Plum-Orange-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 7 is awarded when a combination of “Plum-BAR-Orange” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 8 is awarded when the combination of “Plum-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L, the BAR and orange of the middle reel, and the BAR and orange of the right reel 2R are arranged at positions one level below the bell. "Orange-Orange", "Replay-Orange-BAR", "Replay-BAR-Orange", "Replay-BAR-BAR", "Plum-Orange-Orange", "Plum-Orange-BAR", "Plum-BAR-" When any combination of “Orange” and “Plum-BAR-BAR” is aligned, the “Bell-Bell-Bell” combination is aligned to the upper stage, that is, the invalid line LM1.

  In the left reel 2L, replays and plums are not arranged within 5 frames, and orange and BAR are not arranged within 5 frames for each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. Therefore, even if one of the upper bells 1 to 8 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the winning upper bell configuration symbols must be operated at an appropriate timing. For example, you won't win the winning top bell.

  The middle stage watermelon is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “White 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” is aligned on the winning line LN. When the middle watermelon wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, in the left reel 2L, any one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, but for each of the middle reel 2C and right reel 2R, It is not placed within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the middle stage watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the middle stage watermelon will not be won if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. .

  The right-down watermelon is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Black 7” and “Bell-Watermelon-White 7” is aligned on the winning line LN. When a watermelon with a downward right wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is disposed at a position below one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon, and black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are watermelon. Therefore, when any combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Black 7” and “Bell-Watermelon-White 7” is prepared, “Black 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “White The combination of “7-watermelon-watermelon” and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is lowered to the right, that is, aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, but the watermelon of the middle reel 2C and the black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the right-down watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing, the right-down watermelon will be won. There is no.

  The upper watermelon is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Black 7-Replay” and “Bell-White 7-Replay” is aligned on the winning line LN. When the upper watermelon wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position below one of black 7, white 7 and watermelon, and black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C are watermelon. Since the replay of the right reel 2R is located one position below the watermelon, “Bell-Black 7-Replay” and “Bell-White 7-Replay” are arranged. When any of the combinations is completed, the combinations of “black 7-watermelon-watermelon”, “white 7-watermelon-watermelon”, and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” are aligned in the upper stage, that is, the invalid line LM1.

  Further, in the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, but the black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C and the replay of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the upper watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the upper watermelon will not be won if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. .

  The lower cherries are awarded when the combination of “BAR-Orange-ANY (ANY can be any symbol)”, “BAR-BAR-ANY”, “BAR-Bell-ANY” on the winning line LN. . When the lower cherries win, two medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, since the BAR of the left reel 2L is arranged one position above the cherry, “BAR-orange-ANY (ANY can be any symbol)”, “BAR- When any combination of “BAR-ANY” and “BAR-Bell-ANY” is prepared, “Cherry” on the left reel stops at the lower stage, and the combination of “Cherry-ANY-ANY” moves up and down to the right, That is, they are aligned with the invalid lines LM2 and LM4.

  In the middle reel 2C, any one of orange, BAR, and bell is arranged within 5 frames, but in the left reel 2L, BAR is not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the lower cherries are won in an internal lottery to be described later, the lower cherries will not be won if the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is not operated at an appropriate timing.

  The middle cherries are awarded when the combination of “cherry-ANY-ANY” is arranged on the winning line LN. When the middle cherries win, a medal is paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, cherries are not arranged within 5 frames in the left reel 2L. For this reason, even if the middle cherries are won in an internal lottery to be described later, the middle cherries will not be won if the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is not operated at an appropriate timing.

  One winning combination is awarded when the combination of “Black 7-Cherry-Net 7” is aligned on the winning line LN. When one winning combination wins, one medal is paid out.

  Referring to FIG. 3, the black 7 of the left reel 2L, the cherry of the middle reel, and the net 7 of the right reel are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if one winning combination is won in an internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. I won't win a prize.

  The bells that go up to the right are "Black 7-Bell-Orange", "White 7-Bell-Orange", "Watermelon Bell-Orange", "Black 7-Bell-BAR", and "White 7-Bell-" on the winning line LN. When any combination of “BAR” and “Watermelon Bell-BAR” is completed, a prize is awarded and 10 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, black 7, white 7 and watermelon of the left reel 2L are arranged one position above the bell, and orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are one position below the bell. "Black 7-Bell-Orange", "White 7-Bell-Orange", "Watermelon Bell-Orange", "Black 7-Bell-BAR", "White 7-Bell-BAR" When any combination of “watermelon-bell-BAR” is aligned, the combination of “bell-bell-bell” goes up to the right, that is, aligns with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, orange, BAR One of these is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-up bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  A bevel that goes up to the right is awarded when any combination of “Black 7-Bell-Bell”, “White 7-Bell-Bell”, and “Watermelon Bell-Bell” is placed on the winning line LN. Medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the black 7, white 7 and watermelon of the left reel 2L are arranged one position above the bell, and the bell of the right reel 2R is one below the replay or plum. When the combination of “Black 7-Bell-Bell”, “White 7-Bell-Bell” and “Watermelon Bell-Bell” is prepared, “Bell-Bell-Replay”, “ The combination of “bell-bell-plum” rises to the right, that is, aligns with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, and in the middle reel 2C and right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-up bevel is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Ribbe, which goes up to the right, wins when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Orange” and “Bell-Bell-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN, and 10 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are arranged at a position one below the bell. Therefore, when any combination of “Bell-Bell-Orange” and “Bell-Bell-BAR” is prepared, the combination of “Replay-Bell-Bell” and “Plum-Bell-Bell” is raised to the right, that is, invalid. It will be aligned with the line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, one of orange and BAR is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when an upward lottery is won in an internal lottery to be described later, a winning combination can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the re-game player among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replaying role includes normal replay, lower stage replay, fall replay, promotion replays 1 and 2, special replay, and SP (special) replay.

  The normal replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay”, “Replay-Replay-Plum”, “Plum-Replay-Replay”, and “Plum-Replay-Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. Replays and plums are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R. Therefore, as a general rule, it can be said that the normal replay is a role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if the winning is made.

  The lower replay includes “Bell-Orange-Orange”, “Belle-Orange-Cherry”, “Belle-Orange-Watermelon”, “Belle-Orange-Black 7”, “Belle-Orange-Net 7”, "Bell-Orange-White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-Watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7" , “BELL-BAR-WHITE 7” combination is awarded.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged at a position one above the replay. "Bell-orange-orange", "bell-orange-cherry", "bell-orange-watermelon", "bell-orange-black 7", "bell-orange-net 7", "bell-orange-" "White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-Watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7", "Bell-BAR" When any combination of “White 7” is prepared, “Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / Net 7 / White 7”, “Replay-Plum-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Chi Lee / Net 7 / White 7 ”,“ Plum-Replay-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / Net 7 / White 7 ”,“ Plum-Plum-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / The combination of “net 7 / white 7” is aligned at the lower stage, that is, the invalid line LM2.

  Further, in the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, orange, cherry, watermelon, black 7, net 7 , One of white 7 is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the lower stage replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that the prize can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The tumble replay is awarded when the combination of “bell-replay-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN.

  Referring now to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is located one position above the replay or plum, and the bell of the right reel 2R is located one position below the replay. So, when the combination of “bell-replay-bell” is complete, the combination of “replay-replay-replay”, “replay-replay-plum”, “plum-replay-replay”, “plum-replay-plum” goes up to the right. That is, they are aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a fall replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a prize can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 55, after winning the fall replay in normal / RT0, it is controlled to RT1.

  The promotion replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-bell” and “plum-replay-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN. In the left reel 2L, one of the replays and plums is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. ing. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, the promotion replay 1 can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  Promotion Replay 2 is when any combination of “Bell-Orange-Replay”, “Bell-Orange-Plum”, “Bell-BAR-Replay”, and “Bell-BAR-Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. Winning a prize.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged at a position one above the replay. Since the replay and plum of the right reel 2R are arranged one position above the bell, “bell-orange-replay”, “bell-orange-plum”, “bell-BAR-replay”, “ When the combination of “bell-BAR-plum” is arranged, the combination of “replay-replay-bell” and “plum-replay-bell” is arranged in the lower stage, that is, the invalid line LM2.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, replay and plum are arranged within 5 frames. ing. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the promotion replay 2 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 55, after winning a promotion replay (promotional replay 1 or promotion replay 2) in normal / RT1, it is controlled to normal / RT0. As will be described later, the promotion replay is set not to win independently in the internal lottery in normal / RT2, normal / RT3, and normal / RT4. Further, when the special combination and the promotion replay are won at the same time in the internal lottery in the normal / RT2, the normal / RT3, and the normal / RT4, it is controlled to the internal 1 / RT0 or the internal 2 / RT0 at that time. For this reason, no promotion replay is won in normal / RT2, normal / RT3, or normal / RT4. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled from normal / RT2, normal / RT3, normal / RT4 to normal / RT0, and only when it is normal / RT1 is promoted replay, and only from normal / RT1 is normal / RT0. It is comprised so that it may be controlled.

  The special replay is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay-replay” and “bell-replay-plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, one of the replays and plums is arranged within 5 frames. ing. Therefore, as a general rule, special replays can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if they are elected.

  As shown in FIG. 55, after a special replay is won in normal / RT1 and normal / RT3, control is performed to normal / RT2. As will be described later, the special replay is set so as not to be won independently in the internal lottery in the normal / RT1 and normal / RT4. Further, when the special combination and special replay are won at the same time in the internal / RT1 or normal / RT4 internal lottery, the internal 1 / RT0 or the internal 2 / RT0 is controlled at that time. Therefore, the special replay is not won in normal / RT1 and normal / RT4. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled from normal / RT1, normal / RT4 to normal / RT2, and a special replay is awarded only in normal / RT0, normal / RT3, and from normal / RT0 / normal / RT3. Only normal and RT2 are controlled. When the special replay is won in the normal RT2, the normal RT2 is maintained.

  The SP replay includes “Replay-Orange-Black 7”, “Replay-Orange-Net 7”, “Replay-Orange-White 7”, “Replay-Orange-Plum”, “Replay-BAR-Black 7” on the winning line LN. ”,“ Replay-BAR-Net 7 ”,“ Replay-BAR-White 7 ”,“ Replay-BAR-Plum ”,“ Plum-Orange-Black 7 ”,“ Plum-Orange-Net 7 ”,“ Plum-Orange ” -White 7 "," Plum-Orange-Plum "," Plum-BAR-Black 7 "," Plum-BAR-Net 7 "," Plum-BAR-White 7 "," Plum-BAR-Plum " The winning combination will be awarded when the combination is complete.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one above the orange and BAR, and the black 7, net 7, white 7 and plum of the right reel 2R are orange. , Because it is located one position below the BAR, "Orange-Orange-Orange", "Orange-Orange-BAR", "Orange-BAR-BAR", "BAR-Orange-Orange", "BAR-Orange" The combination of “−BAR” and “BAR-BAR-BAR” rises to the right, that is, aligns with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, replay and plum are arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel orange and BAR are arranged in 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, black 7, net 7, white 7, The plum is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when SP replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that the winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 55, after winning the SP replay in normal / RT2, control is performed in normal / RT3. As will be described later, the SP replay is set not to win independently in the internal lottery in the normal / RT0, normal / RT1, and normal / RT4. Further, when the special combination and SP replay are won at the same time in the internal lottery in the normal / RT0, normal / RT1, and normal / RT4, the internal one / RT0 or the internal two / RT0 is controlled at that time. Therefore, the SP replay is not won in the normal / RT0, normal / RT1, and normal / RT4. As a result, normal / RT0, normal / RT1, and normal / RT4 are not controlled to normal / RT3, and SP replay is awarded only when normal / RT2 and normal / RT3 only from normal / RT2. It is comprised so that it may be controlled. If the special replay is won in the normal RT3, the normal RT3 is maintained.

  Next, the transition outcome will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, the transition items are “replay-orange-bell”, “replay-BAR-bell”, “plum-orange-bell”, “plum-BAR-bell”, “replay-bell-orange”. ”,“ Replay-Bell-BAR ”,“ Plum-Bell-Orange ”,“ Plum-Bell-BAR ”,“ Black 7-Orange-Orange ”,“ Black 7-Orange-BAR ”,“ Black 7-BAR- ” "Orange", "Black 7-BAR-BAR", "White 7-Orange-Orange", "White 7-Orange-BAR", "White 7-BAR-Orange", "White 7-BAR-BAR", "Watermelon -Orange-orange "," Watermelon-orange-BAR "," Watermelon-BAR-orange "," Watermelon-BAR-BAR ". In this embodiment, left bells 1 to 4, middle bells 1 to 4 and right bells 1 to 4 which will be described later are elected, and the upper bells which are elected as the first stop other than the reels which become the winning conditions for the middle bells are elected. When the game is missed, the above-mentioned transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 55, after the transition outcomes are aligned with the pay line LN in the normal / RT0, normal / RT2, normal / RT3, and normal / RT4, control is performed to the normal / RT1. Note that, when the transition outcomes are aligned with the winning line LN in the normal / RT1, the normal / RT1 is maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57 to FIG. 61, combinations of lottery object combinations that are read as lottery object combinations for each gaming state will be described. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the inside 1 (BB1, BB3, RB2 is elected), or the inside 2 (BB2, BB4, RB1 is elected) State), BB (RB), or RB, and the winning combination and the winning probability for the internal lottery are different. Furthermore, if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, at least one of the re-game player and the winning probability to be subject to the internal lottery differs depending on the types of RT0 to RT4. As will be described later as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be read out simultaneously and can be won in duplicate. In FIGS. 57 to 61, “+” is written between winning combinations to indicate that they are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination in the internal lottery.

  In FIGS. 57 to 61, the lottery object combination is shown in the vertical column, and the gaming state is shown in the horizontal column. In the column where the gaming state intersects with the lottery target, a circle indicates that the lottery target is read out in the gaming state, and a cross indicates the lottery target when in the gaming state. This indicates that the combination is not read out.

  Further, the numerical value shown below the circle indicates the number of determination values of a predetermined set value (for example, set value 1). An internal lottery is performed using the number of determination values. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” corresponding to a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). For this reason, for example, the winning probability of the lottery subject for which “300” is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536.

  57 and 58 show combinations of special combinations that are read out as lottery targets for each gaming state, FIG. 59 shows combinations of small combinations that are read out as lottery targets for each gaming state, and FIG. The combination of the re-games read out as the lottery target game for each game state is shown. FIG. 61 shows combinations of the combinations that constitute the simultaneous winning combinations shown in FIGS.

  When normal / RT0, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 roll, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB1 + SP Replay, BB2, BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle cherries, BB2 + one piece, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promoted replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3, BB3 + weak watermelon, BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle cherries, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + tumble replay, BB3 + promoted replay, BB3 + Especially replay, BB4, BB4 + middle cherries, BB4 + 1 sheets, BB4 + special replay, RB1, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak cherries, RB1 + strong cherry, RB1 + 1 sheets, RB2, RB2 + weak watermelon, RB2 + strong watermelon, RB2 + weak cherry, RB2 + Strong cherry, RB2 + 1 role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right Bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry, 1 part, replay GR11, replay GR12, replay GR13, replay GR14, replay GR15, replay GR16, replay GR21, replay GR22, Replay GR23, Replay GR24, and Replay GR25 are internal lottery pairs The role.

  When it is normal / RT1, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 sheet, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB1 + SP Replay, BB2, BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle cherries, BB2 + one piece, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promoted replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3, BB3 + weak watermelon, BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle cherries, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + tumble replay, BB3 + promoted replay, BB3 + Especially replay, BB4, BB4 + middle cherries, BB4 + 1 sheets, BB4 + special replay, RB1, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak cherries, RB1 + strong cherry, RB1 + 1 sheets, RB2, RB2 + weak watermelon, RB2 + strong watermelon, RB2 + weak cherry, RB2 + Strong cherry, RB2 + 1 role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right Bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry, 1 part, normal replay, replay GR1, replay GR2, replay GR3, replay GR4, replay GR5, replay GR6 are internal lottery It becomes a target role.

  When normal / RT2, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 sheet, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB1 + SP Replay, BB2, BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle cherries, BB2 + one piece, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promoted replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3, BB3 + weak watermelon, BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle cherries, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + tumble replay, BB3 + promoted replay, BB3 + Especially replay, BB4, BB4 + middle cherries, BB4 + 1 sheets, BB4 + special replay, RB1, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak cherries, RB1 + strong cherry, RB1 + 1 sheets, RB2, RB2 + weak watermelon, RB2 + strong watermelon, RB2 + weak cherry, RB2 + Strong cherry, RB2 + 1 role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right Bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry, 1 part, normal replay, replay GR31, replay GR32, replay GR33, replay GR34, replay GR35, replay GR36 are internal lottery It becomes a target role.

  When normal / RT3, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle tier, BB1 + 1 double role, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB1 + SP Replay, BB2, BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle cherries, BB2 + one piece, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promoted replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3, BB3 + weak watermelon, BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle cherries, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + tumble replay, BB3 + promoted replay, BB3 + Especially replay, BB4, BB4 + middle cherries, BB4 + 1 sheets, BB4 + special replay, RB1, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak cherries, RB1 + strong cherry, RB1 + 1 sheets, RB2, RB2 + weak watermelon, RB2 + strong watermelon, RB2 + weak cherry, RB2 + Strong cherry, RB2 + 1 role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right Bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry, 1 part, replay GR31, replay GR32, replay GR33, replay GR34, replay GR35, replay GR36, SP replay are internal lottery It becomes a target role.

  When normal / RT4, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 roll, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB1 + SP Replay, BB2, BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle cherries, BB2 + one piece, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promoted replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3, BB3 + weak watermelon, BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle cherries, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + tumble replay, BB3 + promoted replay, BB3 + Especially replay, BB4, BB4 + middle cherries, BB4 + 1 sheets, BB4 + special replay, RB1, RB1 + strong watermelon, RB1 + weak cherries, RB1 + strong cherry, RB1 + 1 sheets, RB2, RB2 + weak watermelon, RB2 + strong watermelon, RB2 + weak cherry, RB2 + Strong cherry, RB2 + 1 role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right Bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, one-piece combination, and normal replay are targeted for internal lottery.

  When internal center 1 · RT0, internal center 2 · RT0, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, center bell 1, center bell 2, center bell 3, center bell 4, right Bell 1, Right bell 2, Right bell 3, Right bell 4, Weak watermelon, Strong watermelon, Weak cherry, Strong cherry, Middle cherry, Single role, Normal replay, Lower replay, SP replay, Tumble replay, Promotion replay, Special Replay is the target for internal lottery.

  When it is BBRB · RT0, the weak cherry and all roles are subject to internal lottery, and when it is RB · RT0, all roles, RB bell 1, RB bell 2, and RB bell 3 are subject to internal lottery.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, a weak watermelon is an upper stage watermelon + right-down watermelon. A strong watermelon is a middle-stage watermelon + right-down watermelon. That is, when the middle stage watermelon wins, it can be recognized that it is a strong watermelon. Weak cherries are lower cherries alone, strong cherries are lower cherries + 1 piece, whereas weak cherries are controlled so that the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” can be derived in the middle. The strong cherry is controlled so that the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” can be derived in the middle stage, the cherry stops in the lower stage of the left reel 2L, and “BAR-BAR-BAR” in the middle stage. You can recognize that it is a strong cherry by having the combination of.

  The bell is a middle bell + a downward-sloping bell. Left bell 1 is right falling bell 5 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 8, left bell 2 is right falling bell + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7, and left bell 3 is right falling bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3, left bell 4 is right falling bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4. The left bells 1 to 4 are also simply called left bells. The middle bell 1 is the middle bell + the upper bell 2 + the upper bell 5, the middle bell 2 is the middle bell + the upper bell 1 + the upper bell 6, and the middle bell 3 is the middle bell + the upper bell 4 + the upper bell. 7 and the middle bell 4 is the middle bell + the upper bell 3 + the upper bell 8. The middle bells 1 to 4 are also simply called middle bells. The right bell 1 is the middle bell + the upper bell 3 + the upper bell 5, the right bell 2 is the middle bell + the upper bell 1 + the upper bell 7, and the right bell 3 is the middle bell + the upper bell 4 + the upper bell. 6 and the right bell 4 is the middle bell + the upper bell 2 + the upper bell 8. The right bells 1 to 4 are also simply called right bells. The left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 are also simply referred to as push order bells.

  All roles are all small roles other than right-up bevel, ie middle bell + right-down bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + Lower right watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle cherries + 1 piece + right rising bell + right rising rivet.

  The RB bell 1 is a right-up bell + right-up bevel, the RB bell 2 is a right-up bell + right-up bevel + right-up beryl, and the RB bell 3 is all small roles, that is, the middle stage bell. + Downward bell + Upper bell 1 + Upper bell 2 + Upper bell 3 + Upper bell 4 + Upper bell 5 + Upper bell 6 + Upper bell 7 + Upper bell 8 + Middle watermelon + Lower watermelon + Upper watermelon + Lower cherry + Middle cherry + Single role + Upright Bell + bevel up to the right + bevel up to the right.

  The promotion replay is promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2.

  Replay GR1 is normal replay + promotion replay 1, replay GR2 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2, replay GR3 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + lower replay, and replay GR4. Is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + lower replay, replay GR5 is normal replay + promotion replay 2, and replay GR6 is normal replay + promotion replay 2 + lower replay.

  Replay GR11 is a fall replay + promotion replay 2, replay GR12 is a fall replay + promotion replay 2 + normal replay, replay GR13 is a fall replay + promotion replay 1, and replay GR14 is a fall Replay + promotion replay 1 + normal replay, replay GR15 is fall replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2, and replay GR16 is fall replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + normal replay.

  Replay GR21 is tumble replay + special replay, replay GR22 is tumble replay + special replay + normal replay, replay GR23 is tumble replay + special replay + lower replay, and replay GR24 is Tumble replay + special replay + normal replay + lower replay. Replay GR25 is tumble replay + special replay + promotion replay 1.

  Replay GR31 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay, replay GR32 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + falling replay, and replay GR33 is special replay + SP replay + lower replay, and replay GR34. Is special replay + SP replay + lower replay + falling replay, replay GR35 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay, and replay GR36 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay + It is a fall replay.

  Also, in normal / RT0-4, etc., weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, single role, normal replay, fall replay, promotion that can be elected simultaneously with any of BB1-BB4, RB1, RB2 The replay and SP replay judgment values are read separately from the bonus in internal 1 · RT0 and internal 2 · RT0, respectively, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, one-piece role, normal Since it is added to Replay, Tumble Replay, Promotion Replay, and SP Replay, the winning probability of each of Strong Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, Single Role, Normal Replay, Tumble Replay, Promotion Replay, and SP Replay is constant. It is secured to be.

  In this way, the internal lottery role varies depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, 1 or 2 inside, BB (RB), or RB, and BB (RB) In RB, the internal lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning probability of the small role is set higher than that in the normal gaming state and inside.

  Also, when the game state is 1 or 2 in the inside, the subject of the internal lottery does not change depending on whether it is 1 in the inside or 2 in the inside, but it is 1 in the inside or inside The internal lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning probabilities of the target re-gamer are different.

  In addition, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the re-game player to be subject to the internal lottery differs depending on whether it is RT0-4, and depending on whether it is RT0-4 An internal lottery is performed using a lottery table with different re-game players and their winning probabilities.

  In this embodiment, when a plurality of types of re-game players are won at the same time, as shown in FIG. 62, a re-game player determined according to the type of the re-game players won simultaneously and the order of stop operations is won. Control is performed so that the line is stopped within a maximum of 4 frames on the line. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining reel control when a plurality of replays are won simultaneously.

  When the replay GR1 (normal replay + promotion replay 1) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, the combination of the promotion replay 1 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left middle right, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When replay GR2 (normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of promotion replay 1 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN Control to stop is performed, and when stop operation is performed in an order other than left and right middle, control is performed to align the combination of normal replays to the winning line LN and stop.

  If Replay GR3 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle left or right order, the combination of Promotion Replay 1 among the selected replay players will be aligned to the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle left and right, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR4 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2 + Lower Replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle right / left order, the combination of Promotion Replay 1 among the selected replaying players is placed on the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle right and left, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When replay GR5 (normal replay + promotion replay 2) is won and stop operation is performed in the order of the middle left and right, the combination of the promotion replay 2 among the selected replay players is stopped in line with the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When Replay GR6 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 2 + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 of the selected replaying players is aligned with the winning line LN Control to stop is performed, and when stop operations are performed in an order other than right center left, control is performed to align the normal replay combination with the winning line LN and stop.

As shown in FIG. 3, the promotion replay 1, symbol constructing the promotion replay 2 and normal replay, the left reel 2L, center reel 2C, because it is located within five frames in all of the right reel 2R, the stop operation order Accordingly, the reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2 or the normal replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for allowing the replays GR1 to 6 to win the promoted replays 1 and 2.

  Therefore, in the normal / RT1 where the replays GR1 to 6 are the targets of the internal lottery, if any of the replays GR1 to GR6 is elected, the promoted replay wins with a probability of 1/6, and the normal / RT0 Will be migrated.

  When replay GR11 (falling replay + promotion replay 2) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, the combination of promotion replay 2 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left middle right, the stop replay combination is controlled to be aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When Replay GR12 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 2 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than left and right, the control for stopping the combination of falling replays on the winning line LN is performed.

  When the replay GR13 (falling replay + promotion replay 1) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle left and right order, the control of stopping the combination of the promotion replay 1 among the selected replay players in the winning line LN If the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle left and right, control is performed to stop the combination of falling replays on the winning line LN.

  If Replay GR14 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle right-left order, the combination of Promotion Replay 1 among the selected replay players will be aligned to the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, the control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays aligned with the winning line LN.

  When Replay GR15 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle left and right, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 of the selected re-players is aligned with the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, control is performed to stop the combination of falling replays aligned with the winning line LN.

  If Replay GR16 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 among the selected re-playing players will be the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the right middle left, the control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays on the winning line LN.

As shown in FIG. 3, the promotion replay 1, symbol constructing the promotion replay 2 and tumble replay the left reel 2L, center reel 2C, because it is located within five frames in all of the right reel 2R, the stop operation order Accordingly, the reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, or the fall replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As described above, different operation modes are set as the operation modes in order to allow the replays GR11 to 16 to win the promoted replays 1 and 2 and to avoid the fall replay.

  Therefore, in the normal / RT0 where the replay GRs 11-16 are subject to internal lottery, if any of the replays GR11-16 is elected, the promoted replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and the normal / RT0 is maintained. On the other hand, the fall replay wins with a probability of 5/6 and shifts to normal RT1.

  When the replay GR21 (falling replay + special replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left middle, right, and right, the combination of the special replays among the replaying players who have won is controlled to stop at the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left middle right, control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays aligned with the winning line LN.

  When replay GR22 (falling replay + special replay + normal replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of special replays among the selected replay players is stopped in line with the winning line LN. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than right and left, the control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays on the winning line LN.

  When replay GR23 (falling replay + special replay + lower replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle / left / right order, the combination of special replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle left and right, the control is performed so that the combination of falling replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When Replay GR24 (Tumble Replay + Special Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is made in the middle right-left order, the combination of special replays among the selected replay players is aligned to the winning line LN If the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle right and left, the combination of falling replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR25 (Tumble Replay + Special Replay + Promotion Replay 1) is elected and right-pressed, that is, if a stop operation is performed in an operation mode in which the right reel 2R is first stopped, the special replay among the replayed players selected When the stop operation is performed in the operation mode in which the combination of the above is aligned with the pay line LN and left-pressed, that is, in the operation mode in which the left reel 2L is first stopped or in the middle mode, that is, in the operation mode in which the middle reel 2C is first stopped. In this case, a control is performed to stop the combination of falling replays in line with the winning line LN.

As shown in FIG. 3, symbol constructing special replay and tumble replay the left reel 2L, center reel 2C, because it is located within five frames in all of the right reel 2R, depending on the stop operation order, the stop switch Regardless of the stop operation timing of 8L to 8R, reel control is performed so that special replay or fall replay is always won.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes in order to win special replays and avoid falling replays with the replays GR21 to GR25.

  For this reason, if one of the replays GR21 to 25 is elected in the normal / RT0 in which the replays GR21 to 25 are the targets of the internal lottery, the special replay wins with a probability of 1/5 and shifts to the normal / RT2. On the other hand, the fall replay wins with a probability of 4/5 and shifts to normal RT1.

  When replay GR31 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle and right, the combination of SP replays among the selected replay players is stopped in line with the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle or right button. In the case where it has been made, a control for stopping the combination of special replays in alignment with the winning line LN is performed.

  When replay GR32 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay + fall replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of SP replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle and right, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the selected re-playing players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of special replays is stopped on the winning line LN.

  When replay GR33 (special replay + SP replay + lower stage replay) is won, and stop operation is performed in the middle left and right order, the control for stopping the combination of SP replays in the winning replay combination in line with the winning line LN If the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right. In the case where it has been made, a control for stopping the combination of special replays in alignment with the winning line LN is performed.

  When Replay GR34 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Lower Replay + Falling Replay) is won and the stop operation is made in the middle right / left order, the combination of SP replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN. If stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped, and left or right press When a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of special replays is stopped on the winning line LN.

  When Replay GR35 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of SP replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in the order of right middle, left, and right, the combination of normal replays among the selected re-playing players is controlled to stop at the winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of special replays is stopped on the winning line LN.

  If Replay GR36 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay + Falling Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of SP Replay among the selected replayers will be the winning line When the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the selected replay players is stopped in alignment with the winning line LN. Alternatively, when a stop operation is performed by middle pressing, control is performed so that the combination of special replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

As shown in FIG. 3, symbol constructing SP replay, special replay and normal replay, the left reel 2L, center reel 2C, because it is located within five frames in all of the right reel 2R, depending on the stop operation order Regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, reel control is performed so that SP replay, special replay, or normal replay always wins.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as operation modes for winning SP replays with the replay GRs 31 to 36, and different operations are performed as operation modes for winning SP replays or normal replays and avoiding special replays. A mode is set.

  Therefore, in the normal / RT2 where the replay GRs 31 to 36 are the targets of the internal lottery, if any of the replay GRs 31 to 36 is won, the SP replay is won with a probability of 1/6 and the process proceeds to the normal / RT3. On the other hand, the normal replay or special replay is won with a probability of 5/6 and the normal / RT2 is maintained. In addition, when SP replay wins as will be described later, one or more navigation stocks that are advantageous to the player will always be given, so if one of the replay GRs 31 to 36 is won in normal / RT2 SP Replay wins with a probability of 1/6, and one or more navigation stocks are given, and it is easy to win SP replays, that is, there is a high possibility that navigation stocks will be given.

  In addition, in normal / RT3 where the replay GRs 31 to 36 are the targets of the internal lottery, if one of the replays GR31 to 36 is won, the SP replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and one navigation stock described later On the other hand, the normal replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and normal RT3 is maintained, and the special replay wins with a probability of 4/6 and shifts to normal RT2.

  Next, when a plurality of types of small combinations are won simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 63, a maximum of four small combinations determined according to the types of small combinations that are simultaneously selected and the order of stop operations are displayed on the winning line. Control is performed so as to stop evenly within the frame drawing range. FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining reel control when a plurality of small combinations are simultaneously won.

  If left bell 1 (lower right bell + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7) wins and the stop operation is performed by pressing to the left, the combination of right down bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  If left bell 2 (lower right bell + upper bell 5 + upper bell 8) is elected and stopped by left-pressing, the combination of right-down bells in the selected small role is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6 or the transitional outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  If left bell 3 (lower right bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the right falling bell combination of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed such that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  If left bell 4 (lower right bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the combination of the right falling bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 4, or the transitional outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

As shown in FIG. 3, the configuration symbol of the right-down bell is arranged within 5 frames in all reels, and when the left bell 1 to 4 is elected, when the stop operation is performed by pushing left. Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the right down bell is always controlled to be aligned with the winning line LN, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the left bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle or right, an appropriate range that will be drawn in the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the selected upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in this case, control is performed so that the shift outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 5) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles with the winning line LN is stopped. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 5, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 6) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles with the winning line LN is stopped. If the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 6, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 7) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles on the winning line LN is stopped. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 4, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles on the winning line LN is stopped. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 8, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

As shown in FIG. 3, the configuration symbol of the middle bell is arranged within 5 frames in all reels, and when the middle bell 1 to 4 is elected, when the stop operation is performed by middle push, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the control is always performed so that the middle bell is aligned with the winning line LN, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Therefore, even if the middle bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right, the appropriate timing that will be the drawing range of the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 If the stop operation is not performed, the winning upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in this case, the control is performed so that the shift outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When right bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 5) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells of the selected small roles is stopped in alignment with the winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 5, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When right bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 7) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells among the selected small roles is stopped in line with the winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When right bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 6) is elected and a stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells among the selected small roles is stopped in alignment with winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 4, the upper bell 6, or the transitional outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When right bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells of the selected small roles is stopped in alignment with winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 8, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

As shown in FIG. 3, the configuration symbols of the middle bell are arranged within 5 frames in all reels, and when the right bell 1 to 4 is elected, when the stop operation is performed by pushing right Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is always performed so that the middle bell is aligned with the winning line LN. On the other hand, the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Because there are places, even if the right bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, at an appropriate timing that is the drawing range of the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 If the stop operation is not performed, the winning upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in this case, the control is performed so that the shift outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when any of the left bell, middle bell, right bell, that is, the push order bell is won, by performing a stop operation in a specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination, While the right-down bell or middle bell always wins, if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination, the upper bell is aligned at 1/4, but at 3/4 In some cases, the upper bells are not aligned and the transition outcomes are aligned.

  For this reason, at the time of winning the push order bell, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not it is operated in a specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination. In other words, even if one of the push order bells is won, it is impossible to intentionally select a specific operation mode unless the type is known. Although a medal can be surely obtained by winning a prize, the upper bell can be won only by 1/4 at a ratio of 2/3, and a medal cannot be surely obtained.

  When RB bell 1 (Right-up bell + Right-up Rivebe) is elected and a stop operation is performed by left-pressing, control is performed so that the combination of right-up bells among the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If a stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed to align the combination of rising right ribs on the winning line LN and stop.

  If RB Bell 2 (Rising Right Bell + Right Rising Bevel + Right Rising Berri) is won and stopped by pressing the middle, the combination of the right rising bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If the stop operation is performed by pressing the button to the left, the control is performed to stop the right-up bevel combination in alignment with the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed by pressing the button to the right, Control is performed to stop the combination in line with the winning line LN.

  RB bell 3 (middle bell + lower right bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + lower watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle cherry +1 sheet role + right-up bell + right-up bevel + right-up bevel), and if the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of right-up bells in the selected small role is aligned with the winning line LN Control to stop is performed, and when a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed to stop the right-beveled bevel combination aligned with the winning line LN.

As shown in FIG. 3, upper right bell, right up Ribebe, structure design of the upward-sloping Beberi is located within five frames in all the reels, when the RB bell 1-4 is elected, stop operation Regardless of the timing, a combination of a right-up bell, a right-up bevel, and a right-up bevel will be aligned on the winning line LN and 10 medals will be paid out, but only at a rate of 1/3, The combination of “bell-bell-bell” will be aligned to the right.

  Although not particularly shown, when a bell (middle bell + lower right bell) is won, a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN regardless of the stop order of the reels and the operation timing. To be controlled.

  Also, all roles (middle bell + lower right bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + right lower watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle (Cherry + 1 hand + right-up bell + right-up rivebe) is selected, the “bell-bell-bell” combination is controlled to rise to the right regardless of the reel stop order and operation timing. The

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, it is controlled to one of the normal gaming state, the inside 1, the inside 2, RB, BB (RB), and in the normal gaming state, RT0-4 It is controlled by either.

  As described above, the RAM 507 of the main control unit 41 is assigned with an area for storing a gaming state flag that can specify a gaming state and an area for storing an RT flag that can specify an RT type. Yes. The gaming state flag is 4-bit data, 0000 indicates the normal gaming state, 0001 indicates the internal one, 0010 indicates the internal two, 0100 indicates the RB, and 1100 indicates the BB (RB). . The RT flag is 4-bit data. 0000 indicates RT0, 0001 indicates RT1, 0010 indicates RT2, 0011 indicates RT3, and 0100 indicates RT4. In addition, the RAM 507 has an RT flag storage area and an area capable of storing the number of remaining RT games for 1 byte, and stores the number of remaining games until the RT ends. Note that in the case of RT0, 3, and 4 that do not end when the number of games is exhausted, 0 is set as the RT remaining game number.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the value of the game state flag is 0000 and the value of the RT flag is 0000, it indicates that the game state flag is RT0 and the game state flag value is 0000 and the RT flag value is 0001. In this case, it indicates that the normal gaming state is RT1, and when the gaming state flag value is 0000 and the RT flag value is 0010, it indicates that the normal gaming state is RT2, and the gaming state flag value is When the value of 0000 and the RT flag is 0011, it indicates that the normal gaming state is RT3, and when the value of the RT flag is 0100, it indicates that the normal gaming state is RT4, and the value of the gaming state flag is If the value of 0001 and RT flag is 0000, it indicates that it is 1 inside, and if the value of game state flag is 0010 and the value of RT flag is 0000, If the value of the game state flag is 0100 and the value of the RT flag is 0000, it indicates RB, and if the value of the game state flag is 1100 and the value of the RT flag is 0000 , BB (RB).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the lottery table in which the number of determination values for the target combination is determined, the lottery table for internal one, the lottery table for internal two, the lottery table for RB, and the lottery for BB (RB) Each having a table and a lottery table for a normal gaming state, and further, as a lottery table for a normal gaming state, a lottery table for RT0, a lottery table for RT1, a lottery table for RT2, a lottery table for RT3, Each has a lottery table for RT4.

  In the internal lottery process, the gaming state flag and the RT flag value stored in the RAM 507 are referred to identify the gaming state and the RT type, select the lottery table accordingly, and select the selected lottery table. By using the lottery, the lottery subject according to the gaming state and the type of RT is drawn with a winning probability according to the gaming state and the type of RT.

  Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 36, first, the value of the gaming state flag stored in the RAM 507 is referred to to determine whether the current gaming state is BB (RB), whether it is RB, It is determined whether it is medium 1 or internal 2 and if the current gaming state is BB (RB), the internal lottery target role in BB (RB) and the number of determination values thereof are stored. The lottery table for BB (RB) is selected and a lottery is performed. If it is during the RB, the lottery table for the RB in which the target part of the internal lottery in RB and the number of determination values thereof are stored is selected and the lottery is performed. If it is 1 in the internal, the lottery table for the internal 1 in which the target part of the internal lottery in the internal 1 and the number of determination values is stored is selected and the lottery is performed. Stores the target combination of the internal lottery and the number of judgment values in the internal 2 While the lottery table for the club 2 is selected and the lottery is performed, if the current gaming state is not BB (RB), RB, and neither the inside 1 nor 2, that is, the normal gaming state, Further, referring to the value of the RT flag stored in the RAM 507, the normal lottery table in which the target combination of the internal lottery and the number of determination values thereof are stored is selected according to the RT type specified from the value. By performing the lottery, the lottery of the target combination corresponding to each gaming state and the type of RT is performed with a winning probability corresponding to each gaming state and the type of RT.

  Normal / RT0 is normal / RT1 when a promotion replay wins (when either one of the replays GR1 to GR6 is elected and a stop operation is performed in the order in which the promotion replay wins), normal / RT1 or normal / RT2 Shifts when the game is completed due to the consumption of the specified number of games. At this time, the value of the game state flag does not change from 0000 indicating the normal game state, the value of the RT flag is updated to 0000 indicating RT0, and 0 indicating that there is no limit on the number of games as the RT remaining game number. Is set. Regardless of the number of games after the transition to normal / RT0, the normal / RT0 shifts to the normal / RT1 by winning the fall replay or stopping the transition, or to the normal / RT2 by winning the special replay It ends when the special role is elected and moves to the inside 1 or inside 2 inside.

  Usually, the winning probability for special roles in RT0 is normal (about 1/239), the winning probability for replaying roles is high (about 1 / 1.4), and the winning probability for small roles is normal (about 1 / 3.5) However, the winning probability is about 1 / 6.1), and the payout rate of medals per game is 1 or more. In normal / RT0, only the replay GRs 11 to 16 and the replay GRs 21 to 25 among the replaying combinations are targeted for the internal lottery, except when winning at the same time as the special combination. In addition, the total of the winning probabilities of the replays GR11 to 16 is about ½. Among them, the fall replay wins with a probability of 5/6 and moves to RT1, and the total of the winning probabilities of the replays GR21 to 25 is about 1. /4.5, of which a special replay wins with a probability of 1/5, shifts to RT2, a fall replay wins with a probability of 4/5, shifts to RT1, and further, left bell 1-4, middle The total of the winning probabilities for Bells 1 to 4 and Right Bells 1 to 4 is about 1 / 3.9, of which 2/3 × 3/4 has a chance to stop and will move to RT1. Therefore, if the winning of a special role with a low winning probability is not taken into consideration, the expected number of games (average number of games) will be about 1.3 games when transitioning to normal RT0.

  Normal / RT1 shifts when the transition is stopped at normal / RT0, normal / RT2, normal / RT3, normal / RT4, or when a fall replay wins at normal / RT0. At this time, as shown in FIG. 64, the value of the game state flag does not change from 0000 indicating the normal game state, the value of the RT flag is updated to 0001 indicating RT1, and 1000 is set as the number of remaining RT games. The The normal RT1 is such that the number of remaining RT games is subtracted for each game, and the normal number of RT remaining games is reduced to 0 by digesting the specified number of games (1000G in this embodiment).・ It will end when it shifts to RT0, or when the special role is elected and shifts to internal 1 or internal 2.

  Normal / RT1 special role win probability is normal (approx. 1/239), same as RT0, re-game player win probability is lower than normal / RT0 normal (approx. 1 / 7.3), small role win The probability is normal (normally about 1 / 3.5, but the winning probability is about 1 / 6.1) like RT0, and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1. Further, in normal / RT1, only normal replay and replay GR1 to replay GR1 to 6 are included in the internal lottery. In addition, the total of the winning probabilities of replays GR1 to GR6 is about 1 / 8.7, and the promotion replay wins with a probability of 1/6 of them, and the transition to normal / RT0 is made. If the winning combination is not taken into consideration, the number of expected games (average number of games) is about 52 games when transitioning to normal / RT1.

  Normal / RT2 shifts when a special replay wins in normal / RT0 or normal / RT3. At this time, the value of the game state flag does not change from 0000 indicating the normal game state, the value of the RT flag is updated to 0010 indicating RT2, and 30 is set as the number of remaining RT games. The normal RT 2 is such that the number of remaining RT games is subtracted for each game, and the normal number of RT remaining games is reduced to 0 by digesting the specified number of games (30G in this embodiment).・ Move to RT0, SP replay wins and move to normal ・ RT3, or move to stop and move to normal ・ RT1, or special role wins and becomes 1 in internal or 2 in internal It ends by migrating.

  Normal / RT2 special role win probability is normal (approx. 1/239), same as RT0, re-game player win probability is almost the same as RT (0), high probability (approx. 1 / 1.4), small The winning probability of the combination is normal (normally about 1 / 3.5, but the winning probability is about 1 / 6.1) as with RT0, and the payout rate of medals per game is 1 or more. Also, in normal / RT2, only the normal replay and replay GR31 to 36 of the replaying combinations are subject to internal lottery, except when winning at the same time as the special combination. In addition, the total of the winning probabilities of the replays GR31 to 36 is about 1/129, of which the SP replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and shifts to normal / RT3, and the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 1 4, the total of the winning probabilities of right bells 1 to 4 is about 1 / 3.9, and the transition will stop with a probability of 2/3 × 3/4, and will move to normal / RT1. If the special role with a low winning probability is not taken into consideration, the expected number of games (average number of games) will be about 7.9 when the game is shifted to the normal RT2.

  Normal / RT3 shifts when SP replay wins in normal / RT2. At this time, the value of the game state flag does not change from 0000 indicating the normal game state, the value of the RT flag is updated to 0011 indicating RT3, and 0 indicating that there is no limit on the number of games as the RT remaining game number. Is set. Regardless of the number of games since the transition to normal / RT3, whether or not the normal / RT3 shifts to the normal / RT2 with the special replay winning, or the transition outcome stops and shifts to the normal / RT1 When the special role is elected and moves to the inside 1 or the inside 2, it ends.

  In normal / RT3, the probability of winning a special role is normal (approximately 1/239), as in RT0, and the winning probability of a replaying player is almost the same as RT (0), with a high probability (approximately 1 / 1.4), small The winning probability of the combination is normal (normally about 1 / 3.5, but the winning probability is about 1 / 6.1) as with RT0, and the payout rate of medals per game is 1 or more. Also, in normal / RT3, only the replay GRs 31 to 36 and the SP replay are subject to the internal lottery except for the case where the special combination is won at the same time. In addition, the total of the winning probabilities of Replay GR31 to 36 is about 1 / 1.4. Among them, special replay wins with a probability of 2/3. 1 to 4 and right bells 1 to 4 have a total winning probability of about 1 / 3.9, of which 2/3 × 3/4 has the chance to stop and move to normal / RT1 Therefore, if the special role with a low winning probability is not taken into account, the expected number of games (average number of games) is about 1.7 when the game is shifted to the normal RT3.

  Normal / RT4 shifts to the end of BB (RB) and RB. At this time, the value of the game state flag does not change from 0000 indicating the normal game state, the value of the RT flag is updated to 0011 indicating RT3, and 0 indicating that there is no limit on the number of games as the RT remaining game number. Is set. Regardless of the number of games since the transition to the normal / RT4, the normal / RT4 stops the transition and moves to the RT1, or the special role is elected and moves to the internal 1 or the internal 2 To finish.

  The winning probability for special roles in normal / RT4 is normal (about 1/239), the winning probability for re-playing roles is normal / normally lower than RT0 (about 1 / 7.3), and the winning probability for small roles is normal / RT0 As usual, it is normal (about 1 / 3.5, but the winning probability is about 1 / 6.1), and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1. Moreover, in normal / RT4, except for the case where the winning combination is won at the same time as the special combination, only the normal replay among the re-playing combination is subject to internal lottery. The total winning probability of left bells 1-4, middle bells 1-4, and right bells 1-4 is about 1 / 3.9, of which 2/3 × 3/4 has a chance of stopping, Since the transition to normal / RT1 is made, if the special role with a low winning probability is not taken into consideration, the expected number of games (average number of games) is about 7.9 games when the transition is made to normal / RT2. .

  The inside 1 shifts when BB1, BB3, RB2 among the special roles are won in the normal gaming state. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65, the value of the game state flag is updated to 0001 indicating 1 in the inside, the value of the RT flag is updated to 0000 indicating RT0, and the number of games remaining is 0 as the RT remaining game number. Updated to Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to the inside, the inside 1 finishes when the special role that triggered the transition to the inside 1 wins and shifts to BB (RB) or RB. .

  In internal 1 the special role is not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probability of re-playing role is lower than normal RT0, normal RT2, normal RT3, but higher than normal RT1, normal RT4 Probability (approx. 1 / 4.2), winning probability of small role is normal (approx. 1 / 3.5, but winning probability is approx. 1 / 6.1), and medal payout rate per game is less than 1 It becomes. Moreover, in the inside 1, only the normal replay and the lower replay among the re-game players are targeted for the internal lottery.

  The inside 2 shifts when BB2, BB4, RB1 among special roles are won in the normal gaming state. At this time, the value of the game state flag is updated to 0010 indicating 2 inside, the value of the RT flag is updated to 0000 indicating RT0, and the number of games is also updated to 0 as the number of remaining RT games. Then, inside 2 ends regardless of the number of games since the transition to the inside, when the special combination that triggered the transition to the inside 2 wins and shifts to BB (RB) or RB. .

  In internal 2, the special role is not eligible for internal lottery, and the winning probability of replaying is lower than normal RT0, normal RT2, normal RT3, but normal RT1, normal RT4, internal 1 Higher probability (approx. 1 / 2.9), the winning probability of a small role is normal (approx. 1 / 3.5, but the winning probability is approx. 1 / 6.1), and medals are paid out per game. The rate is less than 1. Further, in the inside 2, only the normal replay and the lower replay among the re-game players are targeted for the internal lottery.

  RB shifts when RB1 or RB2 wins in 1 and 2 inside. At this time, the value of the game state flag is updated to 0100 indicating RB, the value of the RT flag does not change from 0000 indicating RT (0), and the number of remaining RT games does not change from 0. And RB is complete | finished by digesting 12 games or winning 6 times.

  In RB, the special role and re-playing role are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probability of the small role is higher than normal 1 and 2 in the normal gaming state, high probability (about 1 / 1.01), The payout rate of medals per game is 1 or more.

  BB (RB) shifts when BB wins inside. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65, the value of the game state flag is updated to 1100 indicating BB (RB), the value of the RT flag is not changed from 0000 indicating RT (0), and the number of remaining RT games is also the same. No change from zero. Then, BB (RB) ends when the total number of medals paid out to BB (RB) exceeds the prescribed number, regardless of the number of games since the transition to BB (RB).

  In BB (RB), special roles and re-playing roles are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probability of small roles is higher than the normal gaming state, 1 or 2 inside, and high probability (about 1 / 1.00) The medal payout rate per game is 1 or more.

  Among the normal gaming state, 1, 2, RB, and BB (RB), RB and BB (RB) are the most advantageous gaming states with the highest medal payout rate per game.

  RT0, RT2, RT4, RT0-4 in the normal gaming state have a high probability that the re-gamer wins and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT1, 4, RT1 4 can be said to be a more advantageous state for the player.

  RT0, 2, and 3 in the normal gaming state both have a higher medal payout rate per game than RT1 and 4, but RT3 is the most expected to acquire the number of navigation stocks described below. It can be said that the player is more advantageous than RTs 2 and 3. Further, while there may be a direct transition from RT2 to RT3, there is no direct transition from RT0 to RT3, and in this respect RT2 can be said to be a more advantageous state for the player than RT0.

  RT0 and 4 in the normal gaming state are lower than RT0, 2 and 3 in that the winning probability of the re-gamer is low and the payout rate of medals per game is lower than RT0, 2 and 3. This is a disadvantage for the player.

  Further, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is RT0 to 3, the sub-control unit 91 provides an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect that notifies the internal lottery result can be executed. The production state can be controlled.

  Here, the gaming state and the transition state of RT will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, when RB or BB (RB) is completed, the state shifts to normal / RT4.

  In normal / RT4, when the transition is stopped, the transition is made to RT1, and when the special role is elected, the transition is made to internal 1 or internal 2 according to the type of the special role won.

  In normal / RT4, if any of the left bells 1-4, middle bells 1-4, right bells 1-4 is won and the small role cannot be won, the transitional outcome will stop. Therefore, any of the left bell 1-4, the middle bell 1-4, the right bell 1-4 can be won and the small role can be won in the normal RT 4 which has been shifted to after the end of RB or BB (RB) If not, the process moves to normal RT1.

  Normally, in RT1, the special role is not won, the promotion replay is not won, the specified number of games (1000G) is consumed, or the promotion replay wins, and the normal role is transferred to RT0, and the special role is won Depending on the type of the special role that has been won, the game moves to the inside 1 or 2 inside.

  Usually ・ Replay GR1-6 wins in RT1, and the promotion replay wins when the stop order is correct. Therefore, in normal ・ RT1, replay GR1-6 wins and corrects in the order of stop. It will shift to RT0.

  In normal / RT0, if the fall replay wins, or if the transition is stopped, it moves to normal / RT1, and if the special replay wins, it moves to normal / RT2, and the special role is won. Depending on the type of the special role, it shifts to 1 inside or 2 inside.

  Usually, the replays GR11 to 16 are won at RT0, the promotion replay wins when the stopping order is correct, and the fall replay wins when the answer is incorrect. In addition, when the replays GR21 to 25 are elected in normal / RT0 and the stop order is correct, the special replay is won, and if the answer is incorrect, the fall replay is won. In addition, in the case of normal / RT0, when any of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4 and the right bells 1 to 4 is won and the small role cannot be won, the transitional outcome stops. Therefore, in normal / RT0, the replay GRs 21 to 25 are elected and the stop order is correct, so that the transition is made to normal / RT2 and the replay GRs 11 to 16 are elected and the stop order is incorrect or the left bell 1 -4, middle bell 1 to 4, right bell 1 to 4 are elected, and if it is not possible to win a small role, it will shift to normal · RT1.

  Normally, in RT2, the special role is not won, SP replay is not won, and the regular game number (30G) is used to move to normal RT0, and SP replay is won to move to normal RT3, When the special role is elected, it shifts to 1 inside or 2 inside depending on the kind of the special role won.

  In normal / RT2, the replay GRs 31 to 36 are won, and the SP replay wins when the stop order is correct. Further, in the normal / RT2, when any of the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4 and the right bell 1 to 4 is won and the small role cannot be won, the transitional outcome stops. For this reason, in normal / RT2, the replays GR31 to 36 are elected, and when the stopping order is correct, the routine proceeds to normal / RT3, and any of the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4 Will be transferred to normal / RT1 if the winning combination is not successful.

  In normal / RT3, when the special replay wins, it moves to RT2, and when the transition roll stops, it moves to normal / RT1, and the special role is elected. Transition to Medium 1 or Internal 2

  In normal / RT3, the replay GRs 31 to 36 are elected, the SP replay or the normal replay is won when the stop order is correct, and the special replay is won if the answer is incorrect. Further, in the normal / RT3, when any one of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4 and the right bells 1 to 4 is won and the small role cannot be won, the transitional outcome is stopped. For this reason, in normal / RT3, the replay GRs 31 to 36 are elected, and the stop order becomes incorrect, so the routine proceeds to normal / RT2, and the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, the right bell 1 to 4 If either of them wins and the small combination cannot be won, the routine will shift to RT1.

  In the inside 1 and 2, the special role that triggers the transition to the inside wins a transition to RB or BB (RB).

  In this embodiment, as described above, the game state flag is assigned to the general work that is initialized when the setting is changed in the area of the RAM 507, while the RT flag and the number of remaining RT games are included in the area of the RAM 507. Assigned to important work that is not initialized when the setting is changed.

  Therefore, when the setting is changed in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 66, the gaming state flag is initialized and updated to 0000 indicating the normal gaming state, but the RT flag value and the RT remaining game are updated. Since the value of the number is maintained as it is before the setting change, when the setting is changed in the normal gaming state, the RT type before the setting change and the number of remaining RT games are inherited even after the setting is changed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the internal medium 1 or the internal medium 2, the value of the RT flag is updated to 0000 indicating RT0, and then the transitioned RB Alternatively, the value of the RT flag is maintained at 0000 indicating RT0 until BB (RB) ends.

  For this reason, when the setting is changed in the inside 1 and 2, the gaming state flag is initialized and updated to 0000 indicating the normal gaming state as shown in FIG. 67, and the value of the RT flag is maintained. However, since 0000 indicating RT0 is always set, when the setting is changed in the inside, the game is always in the normal gaming state RT0.

  Similarly, when the setting is changed in BB (RB), as shown in FIG. 68, the gaming state flag is initialized and updated to 0000 indicating the normal gaming state, and the value of the RT flag is maintained. Since 0000 indicating RT0 is always set, even when the setting is changed in BB (RB), the state is always RT0 in the normal gaming state.

  Even in the case of a slot machine that can maintain the game state before the change even if the setting is changed, an extremely advantageous game state such as a bonus is generally initialized before opening the store. For this reason, in a conventional slot machine, a specific game state that is extremely advantageous to the player is ended by changing the setting, but in order to specify whether the game state before the setting change is a specific game state, The data indicating the state is maintained, and after the setting change, when the data indicating the specific gaming state is set, the data indicating the specific gaming state is initialized at that time and the gaming state is set again. When the setting is changed in a specific gaming state, to initialize the gaming state after the change, the data initialized after the change, that is, the data that is not required after the setting change is maintained. It was necessary to keep.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the setting is changed, the data before the change is maintained for the RT flag and the number of remaining RT games, while the value before the setting change is initially set for the game state flag. Since it is updated to a value indicating the normal gaming state, only the probability of the internal lottery specified by the RT flag and the number of remaining games can be taken over even after the setting change, and the internal specified by the gaming state flag The probability of the lottery can be initialized by changing the setting. Then, when a value indicating a specific gaming state (a value indicating internal or BB (RB)) is set as the gaming state flag, the RT flag and the number of remaining RT games are initialized and specified as the gaming state flag. When the value indicating the gaming state is set, the lottery is performed using only the lottery table specified from the gaming state flag without using the lottery table specified from the RT flag in the internal lottery. If the setting is changed while the gaming state flag indicating the specific gaming state is set, the gaming state flag, the RT flag, and the number of remaining RT games are initialized after the setting is changed. Therefore, only the RT flag and the number of remaining RT games are maintained even after the setting is changed, and the gaming state flag indicating a specific gaming state is maintained. When the setting is changed while the game is set, the game state flag is also set without retaining data that is not used after the setting change, that is, data that becomes unnecessary after the setting change as in the past. The RT flag can also be initialized.

  In addition, when the setting is changed in a state in which a gaming state flag indicating a specific gaming state is set, after the setting change, in addition to the gaming state flag and the RT flag, the number of remaining RT games is also initialized. Therefore, when a setting change is made in a state in which a gaming state flag indicating a specific gaming state is set, regardless of the number of games since the gaming state flag is set, Since all of the same state, that is, the gaming state flag, the RT flag, and the RT remaining number of games are initialized, there is no unfairness to the player depending on the timing of the setting change. Fairness can be ensured.

  Further, in this embodiment, when performing the internal lottery, the game state flag is first referred to, and only when the game state flag indicates a game state other than the specific game state, the lottery table is selected with reference to the RT flag. When the game state flag indicates a specific game state, the lottery table used for the specific game state is selected without referring to the RT flag and the lottery is performed. For this reason, after referring to the RT flag and then referring to the gaming state flag, if it is determined that the gaming state flag is a gaming state flag indicating a specific gaming state, a lottery table corresponding to the gaming state flag is displayed. However, the process of referring to the RT flag is wasted, but the RT flag is set only when the gaming state flag is first referred to and the gaming state flag indicates a gaming state other than the specific gaming state as in this embodiment. By selecting the lottery table with reference, it is possible to omit the process of referring to the RT flag that does not affect the lottery table when the game state flag indicating a specific game state is set.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game state flag indicating the internal state 1 or 2, that is, the state where the special combination is won, is set as the specific game state, the RT flag and the RT remaining game number are initialized. When the game state flag indicating the inside 1 or 2 is set, the lottery is performed using only the lottery table specified from the game state flag without using the lottery table specified from the RT flag in the internal lottery. So, if the special role is elected, just change the settings and the game status flag and RT flag will be initialized, so if the game store closes with the special role elected being carried over If you want to initialize the state where the special role is elected and also want to initialize the RT flag and the number of remaining RT games, you only need to change the settings, so the game will be played by the next morning. It can be carried out efficiently the work of the order to end a state in which the prize was carried over a special role as ready to welcome.

  In this embodiment, the RT flag and the number of remaining RT games are initialized even when RB or BB (RB) as a specific gaming state, that is, a gaming state flag indicating a bonus advantageous to the player is set. When the game state flag indicating RB or BB (RB) is set, the lottery specified from the game state flag is not used in the internal lottery without using the lottery table specified from the RT flag. Since the lottery is performed using only the table, the game state flag and the RT flag are initialized only by changing the setting in RB and BB (RB), so that the game is being played during RB or BB (RB). When the store is closed, when RB and BB (RB) are initialized and the RT flag and the number of remaining RT games are also initialized, it is only necessary to change the setting. Therefore, it is possible to perform RB in preparation to welcome the player until the next morning of the opening, the work of the order to terminate the BB (RB) efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, when the RB or BB (RB) ends, that is, when a specific gaming state ends, the RT flag indicating RT4 different from the RT flag when initializing the RT flag, that is, the RT flag indicating RT0 is set. Different RT flag states can be set depending on whether the setting is changed in a specific gaming state or the setting is changed after the end of the specific gaming state. In other words, when a store is closed in a specific gaming state, the game store can select whether to change the setting while maintaining the specific gaming state or to change the setting after the specific gaming state is ended. It is possible to select whether the RT state is RT0 or RT4.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the setting is changed in a specific gaming state among RT0 to RT4 constituting the normal gaming state, the expected number of games until the transition to another gaming state or another RT (average game) Therefore, when the setting is changed in a specific gaming state, it is possible to change to another gaming state or RT with a small number of games, and RT0 in the normal gaming state. The game store can easily select whether to change the game state to another game state or RT.

  In addition, among RT0 to RT4 constituting the normal gaming state, RT0 in the normal gaming state that shifts when the setting is changed in a specific gaming state is a different gaming state or other RT regardless of the number of games after the transition. Since there is no need to select the number of RT games to be transferred when changing settings, there is no need to select another game state or other RT until the specified number of games is consumed. When the setting is changed in the gaming state, it is possible to prevent the gaming store from being restricted from changing to another gaming state or RT. Furthermore, among RT0 to RT4 constituting the normal gaming state, RT0 in the normal gaming state that shifts when the setting is changed in the specific gaming state, that is, RT that shifts simultaneously when shifting to the specific gaming state is the number of games. When the setting is changed in a state in which a gaming state flag indicating a specific gaming state is set, the RT0 after the setting is changed regardless of the number of games since the gaming state flag is set. Since the conditions for shifting from one RT to another do not change depending on the state before the setting change, it will not be unfair to the player depending on the timing of the setting change, so that the fairness of the game can be ensured. it can.

  In this embodiment, when the internal lottery is performed, the gaming state flag is first referred to, and only when the gaming state flag indicates a gaming state other than a specific gaming state, the lottery table is selected with reference to the RT flag. In the case where the gaming state flag indicates a specific gaming state, the lottery table used for the specific gaming state is selected without referring to the RT flag and the lottery is performed, that is, the gaming state flag is referred to with priority. The RT flag is referenced only when necessary, but a lottery table used for internal lottery may be specified using both the gaming state flag value and the RT flag value.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control the AT by executing an AT lottery process. In the AT lottery process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied based on a command from the main control unit 41, and the AT lottery is executed when the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. In the AT lottery, it is determined whether to give the number of navigation stocks and how much the number of navigation stocks is given.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which the AT can be controlled. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock by 1, it is controlled by AT for a predetermined number of games (30G, 50G, 70G, 90G, 111G, 222G, 333G, 555G in this embodiment), during which the navigation effect is executed. Is done. For this reason, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery condition that triggers execution of AT lottery. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a table referred to in the AT lottery.

  The AT lottery condition is satisfied when a cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay is won at RT0 to RT4.

  Normal / RT0 to 4 and when the lottery mode is the normal mode (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or when the SP replay is won and the AT lottery condition is satisfied, the table shown in FIG. AT lottery is performed with reference to FIG. The sub-control unit 91 specifies, for example, normal / RT0 to 4 based on the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example, cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) based on the internal winning command or Specify that you won the SP replay. In addition, the sub control unit 91 specifies that the lottery mode is the normal mode based on the value of the lottery mode flag set in the RAM 91c.

  When the table shown in FIG. 70A is referred to, if the winning combination is a weak cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 95%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 5%. Thus, the AT lottery is performed, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is 0.05 (= 0 × 95% + 1 × 5%).

  When the table shown in FIG. 70A is referenced, if the winning combination is a strong cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 70%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 20%. The AT lottery will be held so that the number of Navistock will be determined to be 2 at the rate of 8%, and the number of Navistock will be determined to be 3 at the rate of 2%, and it is expected to be won by one AT lottery. The number of expected navigation stocks to be obtained is configured to be 0.42 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate.

  When the table shown in FIG. 70 (a) is referred to, if the winning combination is a middle cherry or SP replay, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 70%, and the number of navigation stocks is 2 at a rate of 20%. The AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 10%, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is the number of navigation stocks × The sum of the winning rates is 1.4 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%).

  When normal / RT 0 to 4 and the lottery mode is the high probability A mode, when the cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay is won and the AT lottery condition is satisfied, FIG. 70 (b) The AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. The sub-control unit 91 specifies, for example, normal / RT0 to 4 based on the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example, cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) based on the internal winning command or Specify that you won the SP replay. Further, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the lottery mode is the high probability A mode based on the value of the lottery mode flag set in the RAM 91c.

  When the table shown in FIG. 70B is referred to, if the winning combination is a weak cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 70%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 20%. The AT lottery will be held so that the number of Navistock will be determined to be 2 at the rate of 8%, and the number of Navistock will be determined to be 3 at the rate of 2%, and it is expected to be won by one AT lottery. The number of expected navigation stocks to be obtained is configured to be 0.42 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate.

  When the table shown in FIG. 70 (b) is referenced, if the winning combination is a strong cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 70%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 2 at a rate of 20%. AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 10%, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is the number of navigation stocks × winning rate From the sum, it is configured to be 1.4 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%).

  When the table shown in FIG. 70 (b) is referred, if the winning combination is a middle stage cherry or SP replay, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 2 at a rate of 80%, and the number of navigation stocks is 3 at a rate of 20%. As shown, the AT lottery is performed, and the expected number of Navi stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is 2.2 (= 2 × 80) from the sum of the Navi stock number × winning rate. % + 3 × 20%).

  Normally, when RT0 to RT4 and the lottery mode is the high probability B mode, when the cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay is won and the AT lottery condition is satisfied, FIG. 70 (c) The AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. The sub-control unit 91 specifies, for example, normal / RT0 to 4 based on the gaming state command from the main control unit 41, for example, cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) based on the internal winning command or Specify that you won the SP replay. Further, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the lottery mode is the high probability B mode based on the value of the lottery mode flag set in the RAM 91c.

  When the table shown in FIG. 70 (c) is referred, if the winning combination is a weak cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 70%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 2 at a rate of 20%. AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 10%, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is the number of navigation stocks × winning rate From the sum, it is configured to be 1.4 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%).

  When the table shown in FIG. 70 (c) is referenced, if the winning combination is a strong cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 2 at a rate of 80%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 20%. In this way, the AT lottery is performed, and the expected number of Navi stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is 2.2 (= 2 × 80% + 3 × 20%).

  When the table shown in FIG. 70 (c) is referred to, RT0, 1, 4 are used, and if the winning combination is a middle-stage cherry or SP replay, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 100%. The AT lottery is performed, and the number of expected navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is configured to be 3 (= 3 × 100%) from the sum of the navigation stock number × winning rate. ing.

  When the table shown in FIG. 70 (c) is referred to, RT2 and 3 are used, and if the winning combination is SP replay, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at 70% and navigation stocks at a rate of 20%. As the number is determined to be 2 and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 10%, the AT lottery is performed, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is It is configured to be 1.4 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%) from the sum of the stock number × winning rate.

  As described above, when the normal / RT0 to RT4 and the lottery mode is the high probability A mode, it is possible to expect a larger number of navigation stocks than the normal mode. Furthermore, when the lottery mode is the high probability B mode, it is possible to expect a larger number of navigation stocks than the normal mode and the high probability A mode.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the AT lottery condition is satisfied at the end of the BB.

  When the AT lottery condition is satisfied by the end of BB, the AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. The sub-control unit 91 specifies the end of BB based on, for example, a game state command from the main control unit 41.

  When the table shown in FIG. 70 (d) is referred to, at the end of BB1 to BB3 (at the end of BB accompanying the winning of BB1 to BB3), the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 70%. The AT lottery was held so that the number of Navistock was determined to be 1 at 20%, the number of Navistock was determined to be 2 at 5%, and the number of Navistock was determined to be 3 at 5%. The expected number of Navi stocks that can be expected in one AT lottery is 0.45 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 5% + 3 × 5) from the sum of Navistock number × winning rate %).

  When the table shown in FIG. 70 (d) is referred to, at the end of BB4 (at the end of BB accompanying the winning of BB4), the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 100%. A lottery is performed, and the expected number of Navi stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is configured to be 3 (= 3 × 100%) from the sum of the Navi stock number × winning rate .

  As described above, at the end of BB1 to BB3, the winning of navigation stock can be expected, while at the end of BB4, the winning of three navigation stocks is confirmed.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the AT lottery condition is satisfied at the end of RB (excluding BBRB).

  When the AT lottery condition is satisfied by the end of the RB, the AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. The sub-control unit 91 specifies the end of the RB based on, for example, a game state command from the main control unit 41.

  When the table shown in FIG. 70 (e) is referred to, an AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined at a winning rate corresponding to the number of winning / losing points described later given during RB.

  Specifically, at 0 to 7 points, the AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 0 at 95% and the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at 5%. The number of expected navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained by lottery is configured to be 0.05 (= 0 × 95% + 1 × 5%) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate.

  In 8-15 points, the number of Navistock is determined to be 0 at a rate of 70%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 20%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 2 at a rate of 8%. AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at the ratio of, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is calculated from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate, It is configured to be 0.42 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%).

  At 16-23 points, the number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at 70%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 2 at 20%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at 10%. The number of expected navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is 1.4 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate. × 8% + 3 × 2%).

  At 24-31 points, the AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 2 at 80% and the navigation stock number is determined to be 3 at 20%. The number of expected navigation stocks that can be expected to be configured is 2.2 (= 2 × 80% + 3 × 20%), based on the sum of the number of navigation stocks × the winning rate.

  At 32 points or more, AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 100%, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is the number of navigation stocks X It is configured to be 3 (= 3 x 100%) from the sum of the winning rates.

  As described above, at the end of the RB, the expected value of the winning number of the navigation stock differs depending on the number of winning / losing points acquired during the RB, and the more the winning / losing point number, the more winning the number of navigation stocks can be expected. In particular, if you win 16 or more points, you will win 1 or more Navi stocks. If you win 32 or more points, you will win 3 or more Navi stocks. Is confirmed.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs an effect called “Janken Chance” in each game during the RB. The janken chance is determined by janken according to the winning combination of the game and the first stop reel selected by the player, and the aforementioned winning / losing points are given according to the result.

  FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning combination, stop order and victory / defeat in Janken chance, and FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing the number of winning / losing points given according to the opponent, FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram showing display contents according to the result of winning or losing.

  The sub-control unit 91 first performs an opponent selection lottery for selecting an opponent when the game is started when a chance is played. The opponent consists of A and B. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when B is selected than when A is selected as the opponent, it is given in the case of winning and a draw A lot of winning and losing points are set.

  When the opponent is determined, the opponent is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the winning combination is RB1 to RB3, “go” corresponds to the left reel, “choki” corresponds to the middle reel, right “Par” corresponding to each reel is displayed as an ally card.

  Then, according to the winning combination and the first stop reel selected by the player, the opponent's card is displayed. If the ally card wins, it wins, and if the ally cart and the opponent's card are the same, a draw If you lose a friendly card, you lose.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), if the RB bell 1 is won and the first stop is the left reel, the win is won, and if the first stop is the middle reel, the draw is made and the first stop is made. If it is a right reel, it is determined to lose.

  Also, if RB Bell 2 is elected and the first stop is the left reel, it will be lost, if the first stop is the middle reel, it will be won, and if the first stop is the right reel, it will be a draw. It has been established.

  Also, if RB Bell 3 is elected and the first stop is the left reel, it will be a draw, if the first stop is the middle reel, it will be lost, and if the first stop is the right reel, it will be won. It has been established.

  As described above, when the RB bell 1 is won and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the combination of the right-up bell among the selected small roles is controlled to be aligned with the winning line LN, and the control is performed. When a stop operation is performed by pressing, the control is performed so that the combination of the right rising rivets is aligned with the winning line LN, and the RB bell 2 is selected. Control is performed to stop the right-upward bell combination in the winning combination aligned with the winning line LN, and when the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the control is performed to stop the right-upward beveled combination aligned with the winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by pressing the right button, control is performed so that the combination of the rising rivets is aligned with the winning line LN, the RB bell 3 is selected, and the stop operation is performed by pressing the right button. In the event of a stoppage, the right-up bell combination of the winning small roles is controlled to be aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If left-down or middle-press is stopped, the right-up bevel combination is won. Control to stop the line LN is performed.

  Therefore, in Janken Chance, when the bells are aligned to the right, the teammates win, the bells are not aligned to the right, and “Bell-Bell-Replay / Plum” or “Replay / Plum-Bell” are to the right. -If you have a combination of "bells", you will draw or lose an ally card. That is, the combination of symbols stopped on the reel is linked to the winning or losing chance of the Janken chance in the liquid crystal display 51, and it is possible to recognize that the winning or losing is determined by the stopping order selected by the user.

  Further, when the winning combination is not RB1 to RB3 but all roles or is out of play, that is, when no winning combination is selected, when the opponent is determined, the opponent is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. “Go” is displayed as a friendly card corresponding to each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. In this case, “Choki” is always displayed as the opponent's card, and the team always wins. At this time, if the winning combination is all roles, the bells will always be aligned to the right, and if they are off, none of the combinations will be aligned to the winning line LN. -Black 7 "combination is ready.

  As described above, the number of winning / losing points given when the teammate card wins differs depending on the opponent selected at the start of the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the opponent is won, 4 points are awarded if the opponent is A, and 8 points are awarded if the opponent is B. In the case of a draw, if the opponent is A, 1 point is awarded, and if the opponent is B, 2 points are awarded. In the case of losing, no winning or losing points are awarded regardless of whether the opponent is A or B.

  In addition, when winning all roles, not only 4 points (8 points if the opponent is B) associated with winning, but also + α is 1 to 4 points (2, 4, 6, 8 if the opponent is B) One of the points). These points are allocated equally. Furthermore, in the case of losing, in addition to 16 points, 1 to 4 points (any of 4, 8, 12, 16 if the opponent is B) are given as + α. These points are allocated equally.

  As mentioned above, in the AT lottery at the end of the RB, winning of one or more Navistock will be confirmed with 16 points or more, so one or more will be won by winning 4 or more opponents or pulling out. The winning of Navistock will be confirmed.

  In addition, as described above, when the opponent is B, more wins / loss points will be awarded if the opponent wins or draws, but once the opponent is selected in the opponent selection lottery When B is selected as an opponent, a table with a high ratio of selecting B is selected from the next time onward, and more win / loss points can be expected thereafter.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a winning / losing history of Janken chance over a period of RB, and a winning count number indicating the winning expectation degree of Navistock according to the result of Janken chance.

  In the game history of Janken Chance, “X” is displayed corresponding to the losing game, “△” is displayed corresponding to the draw game, “◯” is displayed corresponding to the game winning “A”, and the game winning “B”. ◎ is displayed corresponding to, and the symbol “7” is displayed corresponding to the missed game.

  The winning count is +0 when losing a chance, +1 when winning, +1 when winning A, +2 when winning B, and +4 when losing. As mentioned above, 4 points will be awarded if you win A, 8 points will be awarded if you win B, 16 points will be awarded if you lose, and one or more navigation stocks will be won if you win more than 16 points. Since the winning count is 4 or more, winning of one or more navigation stocks is confirmed. On the other hand, even if the winning / losing point is less than 16 points, the winning of the Navistock can be expected. Therefore, even if the winning counter is less than 4 at the end of the RB, the winning of the Navistock can be expected.

  As described above, in this embodiment, whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied is determined by the AT lottery process performed by the sub-control unit 91. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the AT lottery is performed.

  When the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more is determined in the AT lottery, the sub-control unit 91 stores an AT flag indicating the AT and the number of navigation stocks in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. Based on the AT flag in the RAM 91c, the sub-control unit 91 specifies whether or not to control to AT, and specifies the remaining number of navigation stocks. When the AT flag indicating AT is set, it is possible to control the AT by consuming one navigation stock number.

  When the number of navigation stocks is acquired when the AT flag indicating AT is set, the number of navigation stocks acquired this time is added to the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag.

  For example, when an AT lottery is performed when an AT flag indicating that the AT is set, the AT flag corresponding to the result of the AT lottery is updated. Updating to the AT flag corresponding to the AT lottery result is, for example, adding the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the result of the current AT lottery to the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. It may be possible to rewrite the number of navigation stocks to an AT flag that specifies the number of navigation stocks, and any method may be used as long as the current AT flag according to the result of the AT lottery can be specified.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs control to the AT based on the AT flag that is set according to the result of the AT lottery by performing the AT management process included in the AT control process when it is normal RT1-4. to manage.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the sub-control unit 91 controls to the AT when the AT flag is specified from the AT flag in normal / RT1. That is, when navigation stock remains, AT control is started. In the period from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the navigation effect can be executed under the control of the AT without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks.

  When it is controlled by AT and when it is controlled from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, or when a predetermined number of games have elapsed in normal / RT0 or normal / RT2, the number of navigation stock is consumed (subtracted) by one. Until the start condition for the AT is established and the navigation effect of a predetermined number of games (in this embodiment, the number of games won in the game number lottery described later, N games in the figure) is executed. It controls to ART which is RT and AT with high winning probability. When the number of navigation stock is consumed, it is updated to the AT flag indicating the number of navigation stock subtracted by 1.

  When the sub-control unit 91 consumes 1 navigation stock in the AT management process, that is, when a transition from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0 or when a predetermined number of games have elapsed in normal / RT0 or normal / RT2, The number-of-games lottery for determining the number of games for which the navigation effect is executed is executed.

  The number-of-games lottery is to determine the number of games of 30G, 50G, 70G, 90G, 111G, 222G, 333G, and 555G by lottery, and is performed with reference to Tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. When table 1 is referenced, the average number of games selected is about 40G. When table 2 is referenced, the average number of games selected is about 45G. When table 3 is referenced, the average number selected. The number of games is about 50G, and when the table 4 is referenced, the average number of games selected is determined to be about 60G.

  These tables 1 to 4 are transferred to a table having a larger average number of games by winning a table transfer lottery. As a trigger for the table transfer lottery, even if the navigation stock remains in the AT, the latent lottery is won and the navigation effect is not executed. If the game shifts to RT4 once, the normal replay is performed during the AT. There are cases where a prize has been won more than a certain number of times. Then, these tables are transferred to a table with a small average number of games when, for example, the transition outcomes are complete in a state where RT4 and no navigation stock remain.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 consumes one navigation stock, and executes a game number notification effect for notifying the determined number of AT games when the number of AT games is determined by the number-of-games lottery. In the game number notification effect, when one navigation stock is consumed, the player is prompted to operate the effect switch 56, and the effect is to notify the number of games in response to the operation of the effect switch 56. It is.

  In the game number notification effect, if the number of games won in the game number lottery is 90 or less, the number of games won in response to one operation of the effect switch 56 is notified, and 111 or more If the number of games is won, after 90 games have been informed once, the operation of the effect switch 56 is further urged and finally determined in response to the operation of the effect switch 56 in that state. The number of games played is notified, and the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

  Note that, when the betting number setting operation is performed without operating the effect switch 56 and the game number notification effect is cancelled, the game number is counted while displaying “????” as the game number. Is started, and an effect is struck as to whether or not the AT ends for each number of games that can be won in the game number lottery. For this reason, the player can know the number of AT games accompanying the navigation stock by operating the effect switch 56 at the time of consumption of the navigation stock, and can operate the effect switch 56 without operating the effect switch 56. By canceling the notification effect, it is possible to choose not to know how long it will last until the AT ends and to maintain the expectation until the end.

  The sub-control unit 91 stores the number of games won in the game number lottery in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 controls to AT during a period until the number of games in the RAM 91c becomes zero. When the number of games remains and the target role of navigation is won, a navigation effect is executed.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing, and controls to non-AT when the remaining number of games becomes 0 in ART. At this time, if the number of navigation stocks indicated by the AT flag is 0, it is updated to the AT flag indicating that it is not AT. In other words, a series of AT termination conditions are satisfied when the AT flag for controlling from AT to non-AT is 0.

  When it is specified from the AT flag when it is controlled to be non-AT that it is not AT, it is not controlled again by the AT and the navigation effect is not executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), when normal / RT0 or normal / RT2, there is a high possibility that the transition outcomes are aligned, and the possibility of being controlled to normal / RT1 is increased.

  On the other hand, if the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag when controlled to non-AT is 1 or more, when the target role of the navigation effect is won, 1 is consumed and the number of games is drawn. The AT is controlled until a navigation effect is performed over the number of won games. Then, the number of navigation stocks is also 0, and the number of navigations is also 0, so that the AT ends.

  The sub-control unit 91 executes a navigation effect by winning the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state when the AT flag is specified by the AT management process. The navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state is replay GR1-6 when it is normal / RT1, replay GR11-16, replay GR21-25 when it is normal / RT0, and replay GR31 when it is normal / RT2. ~ 36. Further, in normal / RT0 to RT3, the push order bell is a common navigation target combination.

  As a navigation effect when the replays GR1 to 6 are won, a push order (see FIG. 62) for winning the promoted replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR1. In addition, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR2, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR3 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 4 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR5, a message such as “middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 6 is won, a message such as “Right Middle Left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when the replays GR11 to 16 are won, a push order (see FIG. 62) for winning the promoted replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR11. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 12, a message such as “Middle right and left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 13, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 14, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 15 is won, a message such as “middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 16 is won, a message such as “right middle left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when the replays GR21 to 25 are won, a push order (see FIG. 62) for winning a special replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 21. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 22 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the replay GR 23 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 24 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 25 is won, a message such as “Right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect (excluding RT3) when the replays GR31 to 36 are won, the push order (see FIG. 62) for winning the SP replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the replay GR 31 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 32 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 33 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 34, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 35, a message such as “middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 36 is won, a message such as “right middle left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In addition, as a navigation effect when one of the push order bells is won, a push order (see FIG. 63) for reliably winning the right-down bell or the middle bell is notified. For example, when winning the left bell, the left reel is stopped as the first stop reel, so that the right falling bell can be reliably won, so “left!” For stopping the left reel as the first stop reel. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when the middle bell is won, the middle bell can be surely won by stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel, so “medium!” For stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel. A message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Also, when the right bell is won, the middle bell can be reliably won by stopping the right reel as the first stop reel, so “right!” For stopping the right reel as the first stop reel. A message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As described above, in the navigation effect in the present embodiment, a message reminiscent of an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified in the same mode regardless of the type of the navigation target role. For this reason, the player can operate in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player without being conscious of the type of the winning navigation target combination.

  In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient if a player is distinguishable according to a winning condition. In addition, the navigation effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  Then, by executing the navigation effect, it is possible to make the promotion replay winning, the special replay winning, the SP replay winning, the bell winning selected intentionally, and avoid the falling replay winning.

  In the AT control process, the sub-control unit 91 performs a lottery mode lottery that determines whether the AT lottery mode is the normal mode, the high probability A mode, or the high probability B mode. In the lottery mode lottery, based on a command from the main control unit 41, a predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, a normal watermelon (weak watermelon, strong watermelon) is won at RT0 to 4 or at the end of AT) is established. The lottery mode lottery is executed when it is established.

As described above, the lottery mode indicates the winning probability of the number of navigation stocks applied to the AT lottery. High probability A mode than in the normal mode, more of the high probability B mode is more of Navi stock number of the acquisition is adapted to be expected than the high probability A mode.

  Usually, when the lottery mode lottery condition is established by winning the weak watermelon in RT0 to RT4, the lottery mode lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the weak watermelon in FIG. For example, the sub-control unit 91 specifies normal / RT0 to 4 based on the game state command from the main control unit 41, and specifies weak watermelon winning based on the internal winning command.

  When the table corresponding to the weak watermelon in FIG. 73 is referenced, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 50%, the high probability A mode is determined at a rate of 40%, and the high probability B mode is determined at a rate of 10%. As described above, a lottery mode lottery is performed.

  Usually, when the lottery mode lottery condition is established by winning the strong watermelon in RT0 to RT4, the lottery mode lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the strong watermelon in FIG. For example, the sub-control unit 91 specifies normal RT0 to RT4 based on the game state command from the main control unit 41, and specifies strong watermelon winning based on the internal winning command.

  When the table corresponding to the strong watermelon in FIG. 73 is referred to, the lottery mode lottery is performed so that the high probability A mode is determined at a rate of 50% and the high probability B mode is determined at a rate of 50%. .

  When the lottery mode lottery condition is satisfied by the end of AT, the lottery mode lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the AT end of FIG. The sub-control unit 91 specifies the AT end based on the AT flag and the number of remaining games, for example.

  When the table corresponding to the AT end in FIG. 73 is referred to, the lottery mode lottery is performed so that the high probability A mode is determined at a rate of 80% and the high probability B mode is determined at a rate of 20%. .

In addition, when controlled to the high probability A mode and the high probability B mode, the mode drop lottery is performed at the time of normal / replay of normal RT0, 1, 2, 4 and the high probability A mode is selected. If it is RT0, 1, 4, it will shift to the normal mode with a probability of about 1/9 at the time of normal replay winning, and if it is normal · RT2, it will shift to the normal mode with a probability of about 1/60 at the time of normal replay winning If it is high-probability B mode and normal / RT0, 1, and 4, it will shift to high-probability A mode with a probability of about 1/3 of normal replay winning, and if it is normal / RT2, normal replay winning Transition to high probability A mode with a probability of 1/20 of the hour.

  In the sub-control unit 91, as described above, when the SP replay is won, an AT lottery is performed and a winning of one or more navigation stock numbers is acquired. Furthermore, when SP replay wins in normal / RT2, one or more navigation stocks can be acquired, and the winning probability of replay GR31 to 36 in which SP replay is allowed shifts to normal / RT3, which is higher than normal / RT2. It will be.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 controls to any one of the no-navigation section, the partial navigation section, and the entire navigation section as shown in FIG. 74 in normal / RT3.

  The section without navigation is a section without any navigation when the replays GR31 to 36 are selected. In normal / RT3, a special replay win will result in a transition to normal / RT2, so if replay GR31-36 is won in a no-navigation section, SP replay wins with a probability of 1/6. One or more Navi stocks will be awarded, and a normal replay will be awarded with a probability of 1/6. These will be combined to maintain a normal RT3 with a probability of 1/3, while a special replay will be awarded with a probability of 4/6. Then, the normal / RT2 transition is made with a probability of 2/3.

  The partial navigation section is a section in which partial navigation is performed in which only the first stop reel that can maintain at least normal / RT3 at the time of winning the replays GR31 to 36 is executed. For this reason, when replay GR31-36 is elected in a partial navigation section, the SP replay wins with a probability of 1/2 by stopping the first stop reel notified by partial navigation first. Even if one or more navigation stocks are given and the SP replay does not win, the normal replay wins with a probability of 1/2 and the normal / RT3 is maintained.

  The whole navigation section is a section in which full navigation is performed in which the push order that can win the SP replay when the replays GR31 to 36 are won is notified. For this reason, if the replays GR31 to 36 are won in all navigation sections, the reels are stopped in the order informed by the entire navigation, so that the SP replay will win and at least one navigation stock will be given. It becomes.

  In some navigation sections, a part of navigation is performed in which the first stop reel is notified to enable normal / RT3 to be maintained when replays GR31 to 36 are selected, and replays GR31 to 36 are selected in all navigation sections. In some cases, the entire navigation system that notifies the push order that allows the SP replay to be awarded is executed, but the notification mode in these partial navigation systems and all navigation systems is the same as the navigation effect described above. An aspect may be sufficient and a different aspect may be sufficient.

  Also, in normal / RT3, in any section, when the push order bell is won, the above-mentioned navigation effect is executed, so if the stop operation is performed in the notified order, normal / RT3 Normally, there is no transition to RT1.

  In addition, while controlled to normal / RT3, even if some navigation, all navigation, and navigation effects are executed, the number of AT games will not progress, and if you switch to normal / RT3 during AT In the meantime, the Navistock number is not digested.

When the sub-control unit 91 shifts to normal / RT3, the sub-control unit 91 first determines whether to control to a non-navigation section, to a partial navigation section, or to control to an entire navigation section. These differ in the proportion of the sections controlled according to the state before the transition to normal / RT3. For example, in this embodiment, if the state before the transition is non-AT, the no-navigation section, the partial navigation section, and the entire navigation section are determined equally, and if the state before the transition is AT, the partial navigation section Or all navigation sections are determined equally. Further, when the state before the transition is AT and the lottery mode is the high probability B mode, the entire navigation section is determined.

  When the transition to a partial navigation section or the entire navigation section is determined, a navigation number lottery for determining the remaining number of partial navigations or all navigations is performed. The number of times of winning the navigation is stored in the RAM 91c, and 1 is subtracted every time the replay GR 31-36 is selected and a partial navigation or a full navigation is executed.

  In this embodiment, when a transition to a partial navigation section or an entire navigation section is determined, a navigation number lottery is performed, and a partial navigation or a total navigation is executed for the selected number of navigations. The number of times of navigation may be determined as the number of times of navigation without performing the number of times of navigation. In addition, when the replay GRs 31 to 36 are won in the partial navigation section or the entire navigation section, a navigation execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the partial navigation or the entire navigation is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which all navigation is performed, and when the transition to a partial navigation section or all navigation sections is determined, the winning probability of the navigation execution lottery is determined from a plurality of different probabilities.

  Moreover, once it shifts to all the navigation sections, it shifts to a part navigation section when the number of times of navigation becomes 0 without shifting to other sections until the number of navigations won at that time becomes 0. . When all navigation sections are finished, skip all navigation sections and move to no-navigation sections without skipping some navigation sections. To do. When a transition is made from the entire navigation section to the partial navigation section, the navigation frequency lottery is performed again, and the navigation frequency of the partial navigation section is determined. When the number of times of navigation in a part of the navigation section is also zero, the transition is made to the section without navigation, during which the replays GR31 to 36 are elected, and the special replay wins to transition to RT2.

  Also, if a role with a relatively low probability of winning, such as cherry or watermelon, is won in a non-navigation section or a partial navigation section, if there is no navigation section, a partial navigation section or a partial navigation section In the section, the section promotion lottery that decides whether or not to be promoted to all navigation sections is performed, and by winning, if there is no navigation section, some navigation sections or all navigation sections, some navigation sections Then, it shifts to the whole navigation section. In addition, even if some navigation sections are not promoted to all navigation sections, a lottery will be added to the number of navigations, and if you win, the number of winning will be added to the number of navigations Yes. In addition, if a role with a relatively low probability of winning such as cherry or watermelon is won in all navigation sections, a lottery will be added to the number of navigations, and if won, the number of times won will be added to the number of navigations. It has become.

  In this embodiment, in a no-navigation section or a partial navigation section, if a role with a relatively low probability of winning such as cherry or watermelon is elected, if there is no navigation section, a partial navigation section or all navigation sections, In some Navi sections, a lottery for the promotion of sections to determine whether or not to be promoted to all Navi sections and a lottery with an additional number of navigations are performed, but in some Navi sections, SP Replay was won by oneself If the answer is correct in the order of pushing the SP replay on its own, or if the normal replay or SP replay is won on its own in the no-navigation section, that is, if the normal replay or SP replay is awarded on its own, You may make it perform a promotion lottery or an addition lottery.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the transition status of the navigation section in normal / RT3.

  For example, at the time of transition to normal / RT3, when transition to a partial navigation section is determined and two winnings are determined in the navigation number lottery, the transition is to a partial navigation section, and the remaining number of navigations is two. When the replays GR31 to 34 are elected in this state, a partial navigation in which only the first stop reel capable of maintaining the normal / RT3 is informed is performed, and the normal / RT3 is maintained by performing a stop operation accordingly, The remaining number of navigations is one.

  In this state, if the cherries are won, promoted to all navigation sections, and once won in the navigation count lottery, the system shifts to all navigation sections, and the remaining navigation count is one. When replay GR31-34 is elected in this state, all navigation is performed in which the stop order in which normal / RT3 is maintained and SP replay can be won is notified, and the stop operation is performed accordingly, -RT3 will be maintained and one or more navigation stock will be given. Then, the remaining number of times of navigation is 0, and a shift is made to a part of the navigation section, so the number of navigation times is selected. If the number of times of navigation is selected three times, the system shifts to a partial navigation section, and the remaining number of times of navigation is three. In this state, the watermelon is won and there is no promotion to all navigation, but if the number of navigation times is added and the lottery is won once, some navigation sections are maintained and the number of navigation times is increased to 4 times. .

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal / RT3, when the replays GR31 to 36 are selected, one or more SP replays are awarded, and the special replay that will shift to the normal / RT2 is performed. It is possible to avoid winnings of special replays that will shift to at least normal / RT2 when winning all of the replays GR31-36, all navigation sections in which all navigations in which the stop order to avoid winnings is notified are executed. When there is a partial navigation section in which partial navigation in which only the first stop reel is informed is executed, and no navigation section in which none is notified, and when the first navigation is controlled to the entire navigation section, after the end of all navigation sections Since it is designed to shift to a partial navigation section without immediately shifting to a no-navigation section, all notifications are immediately ended even if all navigation sections are ended. It is possible to win the navigation stock by winning the SP replay by yourself while avoiding the transition to normal / RT2 by being controlled to a part of the navigation section. Can be effectively increased.

  Further, in the state where the number of navigations in all navigation sections remains in RT3, that is, the number of all navigations in which the stop order in which the SP replay is won and the navigation stock can be acquired is informed remains one. There is no transition to the partial navigation section or the no-navigation section, and the transition to the partial navigation section is always made after the number of navigations reaches zero, even though the number of navigations for all navigation sections remains. Therefore, the player can surely digest the number of navigations in the entire navigation section without shifting to a partial navigation section or a section without navigation that is disadvantageous to the entire navigation section.

  Further, the condition for avoiding the transition to normal / RT2 in the normal / RT3 is the first stop reel to be stopped first among the three reels, and the winning condition for the SP replay is to be stopped first in the three reels. The first stop reel and the second stop reel to be stopped next, the latter is reported in all navigation sections, and the former is reported in some navigations in some navigation sections. However, the reel can be stopped by the notified operation mode.

  In addition, a promotion lottery that determines whether or not to be promoted to all navigation sections or partial navigation sections by winning a role with a relatively low probability of winning such as watermelon or cherry in some navigation sections or no navigation sections. If it is selected and won, it will be promoted to the entire navigation section or partial navigation section, so the expectation that navigation stock can be acquired even if the entire navigation section or partial navigation section ends in RT3 is maintained Can be made.

  Even if the special replay wins in normal / RT3 and shifts to normal / RT2, it is possible to shift to normal / RT3 again by winning SP replay in normal / RT2, so normal / RT3 Even if the process ends and the process moves to RT2, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that navigation stock can be acquired.

  In addition, even in the case of normal RT1, which is the most unfavorable gaming state for the player and does not directly shift to normal RT3, the game proceeds to normal RT0 when the promoted replay wins in the normal RT1. In this normal / RT0, when the special replay wins, the normal / RT3 may be directly transferred to the normal / RT3. Therefore, the normal / RT1 also shifts to the normal / RT3 to acquire the navigation stock. You can have a sense of expectation.

  In this embodiment, when the AT target combination is won, the stop mode changes according to the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. However, as the AT target combination, the stop switches 8L, 8C, The stop mode may be changed in accordance with both the operation timing of 8R (so-called eye-pressing timing) and the operation timing and stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. As an operation mode that is advantageous to the player when the AT target combination is won, an effect of notifying the timing of the stop operation or both the timing of the stop operation and the pressing order may be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, SP replay to which one or more navigation stocks are given is applied as an advantageous display result advantageous to the player, but at least a display result advantageous to the player may be used. Display results with a high probability of winning Navistock or a high average value of the number of winning Navistock, and a display result of whether or not to shift to a state advantageous to the player, such as the lottery mode lottery described above May be applied.

  Also, in this embodiment, the normal gaming state is the gaming state that is the most disadvantageous for the player, and the normal replay that does not shift directly to the normal RT3, that is, the promotion replay wins in the normal RT1. Transition to normal / RT0, and in this normal / RT0, a special replay wins to make a transition to normal / RT2 where there is a possibility of direct transition to normal / RT3. At least from normal RT1 as RT1 A configuration that does not shift to normal / RT2 that can be shifted directly to normal / RT3 may be used, or a configuration that can shift directly from normal / RT1 to normal / RT2 may be used.・ Normal / RT2 may be directly transferred to normal / RT3 when conditions for transition to normal / RT2 are satisfied in RT1 Since the row, also shifts to the normal · RT3 in the normal · RT1, it is possible to have a sense of expectation to be to win the Navi stock.

  In the present embodiment, when the SP replay wins in the normal RT2, the normal RT2 shifts to the normal RT3, and then the special replay wins in the normal RT3 to shift again to the normal RT2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the sub CPU 91a receives an SP replay during AT and shifts from normal / RT2 to normal / RT3, that is, an event that cannot be avoided depending on the player's operation. When the normal / RT0, 2 are finished, the AT is temporarily interrupted, and then the special replay is won in the normal / RT3, and then the normal / RT2 is resumed to resume the AT. At this time, after starting counting the number of AT games, if the SP replay is won in the M game and the game moves to normal / RT3, after the AT restarts, the N game (contributed by consuming 1 Navistock) The AT ends with the number of games obtained by subtracting M games from the number of games of 30 or more.

  In the normal / RT3, the winning probability of the re-gamer is almost the same as the normal / RT0 and normal / RT2, and the above-mentioned navigation effect is executed when the push order is won. If the stop operation is performed, the payout rate of medals per game is almost the same as normal / RT0 and normal / RT2, and there is no transition from normal / RT3 to normal / RT1, and it always shifts to RT2. It becomes possible to make it. For this reason, from the player's point of view, even if the AT is interrupted and the normal / RT3 transition is made, only the AT game count is interrupted, and the player continues to be in an advantageous state. Even if the game is restarted and the counting of the number of games is restarted, it can be recognized that a state advantageous to the player continues more than the number of games given by the navigation stock.

  Further, in this embodiment, in any of normal and RT0 to 4, the special role is elected and the game moves to 1 and 2 inside. For this reason, if a special role is elected in normal / RT0 or normal / RT2 and moves to 1 or 2 of the inside, then the elected special role wins and then moves to RB or BB (RB) When RB or BB (RB) is completed, the transition is made to normal / RT4, the transition to normal / RT4 is stopped and the transition to normal / RT1 is performed, and the promotion replay wins in normal / RT1. Thus, the process shifts to normal / RT0 again.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 76 (c) and 76 (d), the sub CPU 91 a is elected as one of the special roles during the AT, and shifts from normal / RT 0 or normal / RT 2 to internal 1 or internal 2. In the case, that is, when normal RT0, 2 is terminated due to an event that cannot be avoided by the player's operation, the AT is temporarily suspended, and then the special role wins and moves to RB or BB (RB) , RB or BB (RB) ends, and transitions to normal / RT4, transition to normal / RT1 by stopping the transition, and special replay wins in normal / RT1, and then transitions back to normal / RT0 To resume AT. At this time, after starting counting the number of AT games, if any special role is elected in the M game and moves from normal RT0 or normal RT2 to internal 1 or internal 2, N games The number of games obtained by subtracting the M game from (the number of games given by consuming 1 Navistock) is equal to or more than the minimum number of games (30 games) given by consuming 1 Navistock. It is determined whether the number of games is less than the number of games, and when the number of games obtained by subtracting M games from N games is 30 games or more, which is the minimum number of games, as shown in FIG. Similar to the AT interruption / resumption associated with the transition, after the AT is resumed, the AT ends with the number of games obtained by subtracting the M game from the N game. On the other hand, when the number of games obtained by subtracting M games from N games is less than the minimum game number of 30 games, as shown in FIG. Unlike the above, the game number lottery is performed again without consuming the Navistock, and the number of games of 30G, 50G, 70G, 90G, 111G, 222G, 333G, and 555G is determined. N games) are controlled by the AT. In other words, when restarting an AT that has been temporarily stopped due to the winning of a special role, if the number of games obtained by subtracting M games from N games is less than the minimum number of 30 games, the navigation stock is reduced to at least 1 after AT restarts. It will be controlled by AT over 30 games that can be consumed and given.

  Note that the AT will not be interrupted if the transition is inadvertently stopped during the AT and the transition is stopped by mistake and the normal / RT0 or normal / RT2 is switched to the normal / RT1. The number of remaining games is also subtracted for each game, but after that, the promotion replay wins, and even if the game moves to normal / RT0, the navigation stock is consumed if the number of remaining AT games remains. There is nothing.

  In this embodiment, when any special role is elected during the AT and moves from normal / RT0 or normal / RT2 to internal 1 or internal 2 and the AT is interrupted, the AT resumes thereafter. Before the transition to normal / RT0, the number of medals paid out per game is less than 1, that is, it is necessary to go through normal / RT4 and normal / RT1 which are disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, when resuming the AT that has been temporarily suspended due to the winning of the special combination, the medal of the player is temporarily reduced.

  For this reason, when counting is resumed from the number of AT games at the time of AT interruption when the AT is resumed, if the number of games remaining at the time of AT interruption is small, the player's medal is temporarily stored as described above. In spite of the decrease, the restarted AT will end immediately, and there is a risk of dissatisfaction with the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when restarting the AT once suspended due to the special role winning, the number of games obtained by subtracting the M games from the N games is less than the minimum 30 games. For example, after AT restarts, it will be controlled by AT for at least 30 games that can be granted by consuming 1 Navistock, and players in normal / RT4 and normal / RT1 that pass before AT restarts Even if the number of medals decreases, the AT is controlled to 30 games or more in the subsequent normal / RT0 and normal / RT2, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when the AT is restarted.

  In addition, when restarting the AT once suspended due to the winning of the special role, if the number of games obtained by subtracting the M games from the N games is 30 or more, which is the minimum number of games, after the AT restarts, Since the AT is controlled over the number of games obtained by subtracting the game, the number of remaining games after restarting does not fall below the number of remaining games when the AT is interrupted by newly drawing the number of games.

  Also, in this embodiment, when restarting an AT that has been temporarily stopped due to the winning of a special role, the number of games obtained by subtracting M games from N games is less than the minimum number of 30 games. When the number of games of 30G, 50G, 70G, 90G, 111G, 222G, 333G, and 555G is determined, the number of games won in accordance with the operation of the effect switch 56 as in the AT start Since the number of games of the AT is notified according to the player's operation, the player is sure that the notification state is controlled for 30 games or more thereafter. Can be recognized. In the game number notification effect at the time of restarting the AT, for example, the remaining number of games is changed to a new number according to the player's operation, and the remaining number of games when the AT is interrupted and the newly determined remaining games are changed. It is preferable that the number is an effect that can recognize both the number and the number of remaining games of the AT can be more reliably recognized.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any special role is elected during AT and transitions from normal / RT0 or normal / RT2 to internal 1 or internal 2, AT is temporarily suspended, and then special The winning combination shifts to RB or BB (RB), RB or BB (RB) ends and shifts to normal / RT4, and when the shift is stopped, shifts to normal / RT1 and then normal / The special replay wins at RT1 and the AT is resumed by moving to normal / RT0 again. Of these, in the normal / RT1, the replays GR1 to 6 are won and the promotion replay wins only when the stop order is correct, and the normal / RT0 is entered to restart the AT. And, when resuming the AT once stopped due to the winning of the special role, when the replays GR1 to 6 are won in the normal RT1, a navigation effect is provided in which the stop order for winning the promoted replay is notified, Since there is no navigation effect other than normal / RT1 after the AT is interrupted, when resuming an AT that has been temporarily stopped due to the winning of a special role, the AT should be resumed by moving to normal / RT0 as early as possible. In addition to normal / RT1 after interruption of AT, it is difficult to shift to normal / RT0.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, one winning line LN set for determining whether or not a combination of symbols constituting a winning combination, and a symbol constituting a winning on the winning line LN are displayed. In order to make it easy to recognize that the combination is complete, it includes four invalid lines LM1 to LM4 set separately from the winning line LN, and a specific symbol combination (for example, bell-bell) is included in the winning line LN. -Bell) The first combination (middle bell, middle watermelon, middle cherry, normal replay, promotion replay 1) that wins a prize and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, replay) other than a specific symbol combination on the winning line LN -Bell-Replay) is awarded and the same value as the first combination (for example, the same number of medals or replays) is given, and the invalid lines LM1 to LM1 A second combination (for example, bell-bell-bell) with a specific symbol combination (for example, right-down bell for middle replay, upper bell, right-down watermelon for middle watermelon, upper watermelon, middle cherry) A lower cherry, a lower replay for normal replay, a fall replay, and a promoted replay 2) for promoted replay 1. The middle cherries are given one medal, while the lower cherries are given two medals. In this case, the middle cherries are only placed on one line. -ANY-ANY "will stop, while the lower cherries will stop at" Cherry-ANY-ANY ", which will stop at one line. On the other hand, since it can be recognized that one medal is given, it can be said that the same value is given in this respect.

  In this embodiment, when the normal replay as the first combination wins, that is, when the combination of replay / plum-replay-replay / plum is aligned with the winning line LN, the transition of RT is not involved. When the fall replay which is the second role corresponding to the normal replay wins, that is, when the combination of the replay / plum-replay-replay / plum is aligned on the invalid line LM4, the normal / RT0 is changed to the normal / RT1. Will be migrated.

  In other words, in this embodiment, different RT settings are made according to the line where the combination of replay / plum-replay-replay / plum is arranged among the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4. 41 only determines whether the replay has been won normally or the fall replay has been won, that is, only the symbol combination aligned with the winning line LN, and without determining the symbol combination aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. It is possible to set different RTs depending on the line in which the combination of plum-replay-replay / plum is arranged.

  In this embodiment, the first combination and the second combination in which different RTs are set are not won simultaneously. For example, in normal / RT0, the first combination and the second combination are won simultaneously. In the case of stopping in the first stop order, the first winning combination is won and the normal / RT1 is transferred, while the second stop order is different from the first stop order. For example, the configuration may be such that the second winning combination is won and transferred to normal / RT2, and such a configuration allows the first winning combination and the second winning combination to be won simultaneously in normal / RT0. Depending on the stop order selected by the player, the lines where the specific symbol combinations are arranged are different, and further, different RT settings can be made according to the differences in the lines where the specific symbol combinations are aligned. Also in this case, different RT settings are made according to the line having a specific symbol combination among the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4. However, the main control unit 41 has the first role. Whether a winning combination or a second combination has been won, that is, only by determining the symbol combination aligned with the winning line LN, without determining the symbol combination aligned with the invalid line LM1-4, a specific symbol combination It is possible to set different RTs according to the aligned lines.

  In addition, when the first combination and the second combination are won simultaneously as described above, and the first combination is stopped in the first stop order, the first combination is won, while the first stop order is In the case of stopping in a different second stop order, in the configuration in which the second combination is won, the first stop order and the second combination are selected as winning combinations that simultaneously win the first combination and the second combination. It is preferable to have multiple types of winning combinations with different stopping orders, that is, having multiple types of winning combinations with different stopping orders in which a specific symbol combination is aligned with the winning line LN and stopping stops on the invalid line. In order to align the specific symbol combination to the winning line LN and the specific symbol combination to the invalid line LM according to the type of the winning combination for winning the first combination and the second combination at the same time. Changing the stop order of Can.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the first combination wins, the sub-control unit 91 blinks the reel LED 55 in the area corresponding to the symbol constituting the specific symbol combination aligned with the winning line LN, and so on. By turning off the reel LED 55 in the area, a line emphasis effect that emphasizes the line with a specific symbol combination is performed, and when the second combination wins, the predetermined symbol combination aligned with the winning line LN The reel LED 55 in the area corresponding to the symbol constituting the specific symbol combination arranged in any one of the invalid lines L1 to L4 is blinked, and the reel LED 55 in the other area is turned off to obtain a specific symbol combination. A line-enhancement effect is performed to emphasize the line, and when the second role wins, a set of symbols aligned with the winning line LN Not a match, it is possible to direct the consciousness of the player to a particular symbol combination, which was aligned with the invalid line LM.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs line emphasis production based on the winning determination command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Specifically, the main control unit 41 determines whether the first combination has won or the second combination has won when a specific symbol combination is aligned with either the winning line LN or the invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4. That is, only information that can specify the combination of symbols arranged on the winning line LN is transmitted as a winning determination command, and the sub-control unit 91 determines the winning line LN when the winning of the first combination is specified from the winning determination command. When the second combination winning is specified from the winning determination command while the reel LED 55 in the area corresponding to is controlled to blink, a specific symbol combination corresponding to the type of the second combination is invalid. The line LM is specified, and the reel LED 55 in the area corresponding to the specified invalid line LM is controlled to blink.

  Thus, when the sub-control unit 91 performs the line emphasis effect, the main control unit 41 receives the first combination when the specific symbol combination is aligned with either the winning line LN or the invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4. Whether or not the second combination has won, that is, only information that can identify the combination of symbols arranged on the winning line LN is transmitted as the winning determination command, and the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 as described above. It is not necessary to determine the combination of symbols arranged in the same manner, and an increase in the data amount of the winning determination command can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the invalid line LM is set to a line that passes through the symbols arranged in a straight line on the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel as in the case of the winning line LN. , A line that passes through any one of the symbols stopped on each reel of the right reel, and is set to a line other than the winning line LN. For example, the upper symbol of the left reel, the middle symbol of the middle reel, It may be set to a line that bends, such as a line that passes through the upper symbol of the right reel. The same applies to the winning line LN.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a specific symbol combination is aligned on the invalid line LM, a specific symbol combination is aligned by blinking the reel LED 55 in the area corresponding to the invalid line LM including the specific symbol combination. A line emphasis effect for emphasizing a line is performed, and it is possible to reliably recognize that a specific symbol combination is arranged in the invalid line LM.

  In this embodiment, a line emphasis effect is performed in order to surely recognize that a specific symbol combination is aligned on the invalid line LM. However, for example, the reel panel 1c and the transparent window 3 are also provided. Including decorations such as printing or forming a line that does not hinder the visual recognition of the design, or printing or forming a part of the line passing through the design in the area excluding the perspective window 3 of the reel panel 1c. Thus, by making it possible to recognize the invalid line LM in which the specific symbol combination can be aligned, it may be recognized that the specific symbol combination is aligned in the invalid line LM.

  Further, in this embodiment, there is no match to the winning line LN other than the specific symbol combinations that can be won when the winning line LN is aligned or when the winning line LM is aligned, but the winning line LN is not aligned. A predetermined symbol combination that is easier to understand than the symbol combinations aligned with the line LN has a third role of aligning with the invalid line LM. The third role corresponds to a right-up bell, a right-up bevel, a right-up rebebe, a part of lower replay, and SP replay.

  The right-up bell is a stop mode in which “bell-bell-bell” is aligned with the invalid line LM4 rising to the right in RB, and “black 7 / white 7 / watermelon bell-orange / BAR” stops at the winning line LN. It can be said that it is an easy-to-understand combination of symbols.

  As for the right-up bevel and the right-up rebebe, at least two “bells” are stopped on the right-up invalid line LM4 together with the right-up bell, and “bell”, “replay”, “ This is a stop mode in which only one of “Plum” is stopped, and in RB, a small part can be formed only by a combination of “Bell”, “Replay”, and “Plum” stopped on the invalid line LM4. It can be said that the combination of symbols is easier to understand than “Black 7-Bell-Bell”, “White 7-Bell-Bell” and “Watermelon Bell-Bell” which stop at the line LN.

  A part of the lower replay is “Replay / Plum-Replay-Watermelon / Cherry / Net 7 / White 7” or “Replay / Plum-Plum-Replay / Plum / Watermelon / Cherry / Net 7 / White” on the lower line LM2. 7 ”is a stop mode in which“ Replay ”or“ Plum ”always stops at the invalid line LM2 of the lower and middle reels of the left reel, and a combination of symbols that stop at the winning line LN, that is,“ Bell ” It can be said that it is an easy-to-understand combination of symbols, except for “orange-orange”, as compared to a stop mode in which all the symbols constituting the combination are different.

  The SP replay is a stop mode in which “BAR / Orange-BAR / Orange-BAR / Orange” stops on the invalid line LM4 that rises to the right, that is, “BAR” or “Orange” always stops on the invalid line LM4 that rises to the right. It is an aspect, and it can be said that the combination of symbols that stop at the winning line LN, that is, a combination of symbols that is easy to understand compared to a stop aspect in which the symbols constituting the combination are all different.

  Also, when the third combination wins and the predetermined symbol combination is aligned on the invalid line LM, the invalid line LM including the predetermined symbol combination is aligned as in the case where the specific symbol combination is aligned. By blinking the reel LED 55 in the area corresponding to the above, a line emphasis effect for emphasizing a line with a specific symbol combination is performed, and that a predetermined symbol combination is aligned with the invalid line LM. It can be surely recognized.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the first to third roles described above, the symbol combinations that are aligned with the winning line LN at the time of winning are easier to understand than the symbol combinations that are aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM1 or the winning line LN. And a fourth combination that does not change the ease of understanding of the symbol combinations aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. The fourth combination corresponds to a single combination and special replay.

  In addition, when the fourth winning combination is won, the reel LED 55 in the area corresponding to the winning line LN having the fourth winning symbol combination is blinked, so that the line having the fourth winning symbol combination is obtained. A line emphasis effect for emphasizing is provided, and it is possible to reliably recognize that the winning combination LN has a combination of symbols of the fourth role.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the reel panel 1c and the lower panel 1d of the front door 1b are combined with a winning line LN or an invalid line LN1 to LN1 to receive a winning combination of symbols, A payout table 1 in which values given at the time of winning are associated with each other is displayed.

  These payout tables 1 are directly printed on the reel panel 1c and the lower panel 1d, and can always be confirmed.

  In the payout table 1, on the reel panel 1c side, symbols BB1 to 4 ("black 7-black 7-black 7", "net 7-net 7-net 7", "white 7-white 7-white 7", " Black 7-white 7-net 7 ") and" BIG BONUS "indicating BB (RB) given in accordance with winnings of BB1 to BB4 are displayed in association with each other. "Net 7-Net 7-Black 7", "White 7-White 7-Black 7" and ") are displayed in association with RBs to be given in accordance with winnings of RBs 1 and 2.

  On the lower panel 1d of the payout table 1, the first combination (middle bell, middle watermelon, middle cherry, normal replay) and the second combination (lower right bell for middle bell, upper bell, lower right watermelon for middle watermelon) , Upper watermelon, lower cherry for middle cherry, part of lower replay for normal replay, fall replay, promoted replay 2 for promoted replay 1), that is, the given value is the same and a specific symbol combination (middle bell, right "Bell-Bell-Bell", "Cherry-ANY-ANY" for the falling bell, the upper bell, "Black 7 / White 7 / Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" for the middle watermelon, the lower right watermelon, the upper watermelon, normal replay, lower “Replay / Plum-Replay-Replay / Plum” for replays, tumble replays, promoted replays For the role in which “Replay / Plum-Replay-Bell” for 1 and 2 is aligned with either the winning line LN or the invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4, a combination of specific symbols and values given at the time of winning ( “Bell-Bell-Bell” is “8”, “Cherry-ANY-ANY” is “1”, “Black 7 / White 7 / Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” is “5”, “Replay / Plum-Replay-Replay” / PLUM / BELL "is displayed in association with" REPLAY ").

  In addition, the fourth combination (one-piece combination, right-up bell, special replay), that is, the symbol combination aligned with the winning line LN at the time of winning is easier to understand than the symbol combination aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4. For the combination that does not change the ease of understanding of the symbol combination aligned with the line LN and the symbol combination aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to 4, the symbol combination aligned with the winning line LN at the time of winning ("Black 7-Cherry-net" 7 "," bell-replay-replay / plum "for special replay) and the value given at that time (" black 7-cherry-net 7 "is" 1 "," bell-replay-replay / plum "is" REPLAY ") are displayed in association with each other.

  On the other hand, the symbol combination aligned with the winning line LN when the second combination is won, the symbol combination aligned with the winning line LN when the third winning combination, and the value given when these symbol combinations are aligned with the winning line LN. The display of the relationship between and is omitted.

  In this embodiment, when a long press (operation of 2 seconds or more) of the effect switch 56 is detected, the sub-control unit 91 performs the first to fourth roles as shown in FIG. For all, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the payout table 2 in which the symbol combinations aligned with the winning line LN at the time of winning and the value given at that time are displayed in association with each other. In this embodiment, whether or not an effect is being performed on the liquid crystal display 51 and whether or not the game is in progress (except in the case of an error), a long press of the effect switch 56 is detected. If the payout is made, the payout table 2 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In the payout table 2, as shown in FIG. 76, the symbol combination of BB1 to BB4, “BIG BONUS” indicating BB (RB) as the value given when the winning line LN is aligned, and BB (RB) The end condition of “BB ends with payout of 316 sheets or more” is displayed in association with each other.

  In addition, the symbol combination of RB1 and RB, “REGULAR BONUS” indicating RB as the value given when the winning line LN is aligned, and the RB end condition “RB is finished with 12G or 6 wins” Are displayed in association with each other.

  In addition, a combination of symbols of the small combination and the number of medals awarded when the corresponding small combination is won as a value to be given when the winning line LN is aligned are displayed in association with each other. The combination is displayed in association with “REPLAY” indicating replay as the value given when the winning line LN is aligned.

  For this reason, the player can confirm the relationship between the combination of symbols aligned with the winning line LN at the time of winning and the value given at that time by pressing and holding the effect switch 56 for a long time. .

  As described above, in this embodiment, regardless of the display mode of the liquid crystal display 51, the payout table 1 of the reel panel 1c and the lower panel 1d that are always displayed is given the first and second combinations, that is, the award. The combination of specific symbol combinations and the value given at the time of winning a prize corresponds to the combination of specific symbol combinations in either the winning line LN or the invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4. The relationship between the combination of symbols that are displayed and added to the winning line LN at the time of winning the second combination and the value given at that time is omitted, and is not displayed. However, since the area occupied by the payout table 1 can be reduced, the design of the reel panel 1c and the lower panel 1d is not impaired.

  Further, by long-pressing the effect switch 56, the payout table 2 showing the relationship between the combination of symbols aligned with the winning line LN when the second combination is won and the value given at that time is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is made to display on the device 51, and it becomes possible to confirm the actual symbol combination that will be awarded a prize by aligning with the winning line LN.

  In this embodiment, the payout table 2 is displayed by long-pressing the effect switch 56. However, the payout table 2 may be displayed at least when a predetermined display condition is satisfied. When the standby command transmitted from the main control unit 41 is received after a certain period of time has elapsed after the game is over, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a demonstration, and the payout table 2 is displayed as the demonstration display. Alternatively, the payout table 2 may be displayed by performing a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of the effect switch 56) during the demonstration display. In addition, the payout table 2 is displayed by long-pressing the effect switch 56 regardless of whether the game is being played or whether any effect image is being displayed. Alternatively, the payout table 2 may be displayed by operating the effect switch 56 only when a specific effect (for example, an effect that continues for two or more games) is not being performed. Further, the payout table 2 may be displayed after the game is over.

  In the present embodiment, the payout table 1 is displayed by printing on the reel panel 1c or the lower panel 1d. However, the payout table 1 may be displayed so that it can be always confirmed. The payout table 1 may be configured to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as long as it is always displayed in the highest layer even during production.

Further, in this embodiment, regardless of the display mode of the liquid crystal display 51, the payout table 1 of the reel panel 1c and the lower panel 1d that are always displayed includes the first combination of the first combination and the second combination. Only a specific symbol combination that is aligned with the winning line LN at the time of winning the combination is displayed in association with the value given at that time, and a predetermined symbol combination that is aligned with the winning line LN at the time of winning the second winning combination However, at least a part of the predetermined symbol combinations that are aligned with the winning line LN at the time of winning the second combination may omit the relationship with the value given at that time. For example, in the payout table 1 of the reel panel 1c and the lower panel 1d, a specific symbol combination that is aligned with the winning line LN when the first combination is won and a predetermined symbol combination that is aligned with the winning line LN when the second combination is won. Part is displayed on the payout table 1 reel panel 1c and the lower panel 1d, it may be configured to omit the relation of the combination of the remaining predetermined symbol and its time value to be applied, even in this case, payout Even if Table 1 is large and easy to see, the area occupied by the payout table 1 can be reduced, so that the design of the reel panel 1c and the lower panel 1d is not impaired.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbol combination that is common to any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 is better than the symbol combination that is aligned to the winning line LN at the time of winning, such as the upper bell, upper watermelon, lower replay, and promotion replay 2. , A combination with a small number of combinations (for example, the upper bell has 8 combinations in the winning line LN, whereas the combination in the invalid line LM is one set of “bell-bell-bell”. )), Since the relationship between the symbol combinations aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 and the value given at that time is collectively displayed in the payout table 1, the area occupied by the payout table 1 is further increased. Can be reduced.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs a line emphasis effect that emphasizes the winning line LN when the first combination and the fourth combination win, and a specific symbol when the second combination wins. A line emphasis effect for emphasizing the invalid lines LM having the same combination is performed. That is, a line in which the symbol combinations displayed in the payout table 1 are aligned is emphasized by the line emphasis effect, and the player displays the lines on the payout table 1 based on the symbol combinations emphasized by the line emphasis effect. It is possible to easily grasp the relationship between the given symbol combination and the value given at that time.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting the number of bets and giving game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine that embodies the present invention may be a slot machine to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when 3 is set as the number of bets in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and slots for setting bets using game balls are used. It may be a machine or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls and a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out by winning.

1 slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 start switch 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch 41 main control unit 91 sub control unit 505 CPU
506 ROM
507 RAM
509 Random number circuit 559A Random value register

Claims (1)

Provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable
After variably displaying the variable display unit, a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display units,
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting control information;
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the control information received from the game control means;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
With
The game control means includes
A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the winning to occur before the display result is derived;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result;
A winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning has occurred according to a combination of identification information derived on a specific combination line among the plurality of combination lines straddling the plurality of variable display portions;
Processing including basic processing means for performing basic processing for executing processes in a predetermined order, and periodic interrupt processing means for performing periodic interrupt processing for interrupting the basic processing and executing processing at regular time intervals Circuit,
A communication circuit including control information storage means capable of storing the control information;
Including
The processing circuit is
In the basic processing, a plurality of first control information that makes sense according to the progress of the game is generated, and the control information storage means stores the first control information one by one in the order of transmission,
In the periodic interruption process, the second control information is generated according to an event that occurs regardless of the progress of the game, and the process is stored in the control information storage unit.
The communication circuit performs the production of the control information stored in the control information storage means in parallel without stopping the basic processing and the periodic interrupt processing by the processing circuit in the order in which the control information is stored. Is sent to the control means,
The processing circuit is
Storage of the plurality of first control information in the control information storage means is started, and execution of the periodic interrupt processing is prohibited during a period until the storage of the plurality of first control information is completed. Further includes periodic interruption processing prohibition means,
The prize is
A first prize generated by deriving a combination of specific identification information in a specific combination line among the plurality of combination lines;
A combination of the specific identification information is derived in any combination line other than the specific combination line among the plurality of combination lines, and the specific identification information is included in the specific combination line among the plurality of combination lines. A second prize generated by deriving a combination of predetermined identification information different from the combination of
Including
When the display result is derived to all of the plurality of variable display units and the first winning is generated , the processing circuit includes the specific identification information aligned with the specific combination line among the plurality of combination lines. Specific control information that can specify a combination of the predetermined identification information that can be specified in combination with the specific combination line among the plurality of combination lines when the second winning is generated Generate control information,
The production control means has a combination of the specific identification information on any combination line of the plurality of combination lines, both when the specific control information is received and when the predetermined control information is received. A slot machine characterized by executing an effect based on the derived information .

Images